MIL-STD-129R

18 February 2014

SUPERSEDING

MIL-STD-129P

w/CHANGE 4

19 September 2007

DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE

STANDARD PRACTICE

MILITARY MARKING

FOR SHIPMENT AND STORAGE

AMSC N/A AREA PACK

INCH-POUND

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

ii

FOREWORD

1. This standard is approved for use by all Departments and Agencies of the Department of 

Defense.

2. This standard is to be cited only for military marking for shipment and storage.

3. This standard incorporates MIL-HDBK-129.

4. This revision has resulted in numerous changes to MIL-STD-129 Revision P, Change 4, but 

the most significant ones are:

a. If a single two-dimension (PDF417) bar code cannot accommodate all the information 

for the included item information, a set of Macro PDF417 bar codes encode the identification 

information and the UII information. See Appendix A.

b. A marking exception is provided for DoD originated shipments overpacked for 

convenience of handling.

c. Palletized unit loads are specifically called out for identification and bar code marking.

d. The military shipping label (MSL) format includes a transportation tracking number 

(TTN) as a conditional data element that is only included if the system can generate and encode 

it.

e. The 2D (PDF417) bar code is recommended for use in all packaging identification 

marking and some figures are modified to remove the linear (Code 39) bar codes.

f. Packing list requirements are defined to be one of two types: 1) a content packing list 

for package contents not marked on the packaging, to include sets, kits, and assemblies; 2) a 

shipment packing list for a single-piece or multi-piece shipment units to include applicable 

shipping information.

g. The 2D (PDF417) bar code content for unit pack and container marking was modified 

to include data qualifiers for the part number (DI ‘1P’) and for the quantity and unit of issue (DI 

‘7Q’).

h. The ammunition and explosives section (see 5.14) is completely rewritten to include a 

new ammunition/explosive packaging label. Most of the existing paragraphs are revised; 

however, a large portion of the text is moved to different paragraphs and not changed.

i. The shipment term “customer direct” replaces “direct vendor delivery (DVD)” to align 

with DoD distribution definitions.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

iii

j. Many of the changes were required to align with DoD transitioning to life cycle 

management of serialized items through programs for item unique identification (IUID) and 

serialized item management (see Table III for term definitions). To further enable the IUID 

requirement, the unique identification marking in this standard is changed to include the 

following:

(1) The end-item/product serialized numbers marked on each unit pack, 

container, or palletized unit load include all of the unique item identifiers 

(UII) and assigned serial numbers. Exceptions apply for more than five serial 

numbers and for assorted-item packs.

(2) ISO/IEC 15434 Format 06 envelopes are used to associate line item specific 

data (e.g. document number, NSN, quantity, serial number, UII, etc.). The 

Format 06 envelopes may be used for military shipping label data 

associations and the Format 06 envelopes are used for serialized item number 

associations.

(3) For other than assorted item packs, serial number lists and UII number lists 

are required for the end-item/product NSN if more than five serialized items 

are included in the package.

5. Comments, suggestions, or questions on this document should be addressed to Chief, 

Logistics Support Activity, Packaging, Storage, and Containerization Center,

ATTN: AMXLS-AT-P, 11 Hap Arnold Boulevard, Tobyhanna, PA 18466-5097 or e-mailed to 

toby.pt@us.army.mil. Since contact information can change, you may want to verify the 

currency of this address information using the ASSIST Online database at https://assist.dla.mil.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

iv

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

CONTENTS

v

PARAGRAPH PAGE

FOREWORD..........................................................................................................................ii

1. SCOPE ..................................................................................................................1

1.1 Purpose............................................................................................................1

1.2 Applicability ...................................................................................................1

2. APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS...........................................................................1

2.1 General............................................................................................................1

2.2 Government documents.................................................................................1

2.2.1 Specifications, standards, and handbooks........................................................1

2.2.2 Other Government documents and publications..............................................2

2.3 Non-Government publications......................................................................4

2.4 Order of precedence ......................................................................................6

3. DEFINITIONS .....................................................................................................6

3.1 Abbreviations and acronyms........................................................................6

3.2 Term definitions...........................................................................................11

4. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................20

4.1 Marking unit packs, intermediate and exterior containers, unit 

loads, palletized unit loads, and loose or unpacked items ..............20

4.2 Marking, marking materials, and methods...............................................20

4.2.1 Marking materials..........................................................................................20

4.2.1.1 Waterproofing materials used as protective coatings.....................................20

4.2.1.2 Stencil-marking material................................................................................21

4.2.1.3 Obliterating lacquer, enamel, or paint............................................................21

4.2.1.4 Lithographing, embossing, roller coating, stamping, and inkjet marking .....21

4.2.2 Labels, pressure-sensitive, water-resistant.....................................................21

4.2.2.1 Use of labels...................................................................................................21

4.2.2.2 Protective coating of labels............................................................................21

4.2.2.3 Affixing and securing labels (except for labels on vehicles and related 

equipment).............................................................................................21

4.2.3 Shipping tags..................................................................................................22

4.2.4 Water-resistant envelopes..............................................................................22

4.2.5 Conditions of surfaces to be marked..............................................................22

4.2.6 Marking legibility, durability, and color........................................................22

4.2.7 Marking board or marking panel ...................................................................22

4.2.8 Size of marking..............................................................................................22

5. DETAILED REQUIREMENTS.......................................................................22

5.1 Identification text marking (for ammo/explosives – see 5.14)..................22

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

CONTENTS

vi

PARAGRAPH PAGE

5.1.1 Identification text marking on unit packs and intermediate containers.........24

5.1.2 Identification text marking on exterior containers, palletized unit loads, 

and unpacked items...............................................................................25

5.1.2.1 Package marking for assorted-items pack......................................................27

5.2 Address marking (shipping labels).............................................................28

5.2.1 Military (DoD) and contractor- or vendor-originated address marking ........28

5.2.2 Military shipping label (MSL).......................................................................28

5.2.2.1 MSL size ........................................................................................................30

5.2.2.2 MSL label stock quality .................................................................................30

5.2.2.3 MSL format....................................................................................................30

5.2.2.4 Completing the MSL for address marking.....................................................30

5.2.2.5 Data content of the MSL................................................................................31

5.2.2.6 MSL 2D (PDF417) bar code requirements....................................................34

5.2.2.7 MSL bar code printing standards...................................................................35

5.2.2.8 Human-readable interpretation.......................................................................36

5.2.3 DoD shipments sent through the U.S. Postal Service and commercial 

parcel services.......................................................................................36

5.3 Placement of identification text (for ammo/explosives – see 5.14) and 

address marking. ................................................................................36

5.3.1 Placement of identification text marking on unit packs and intermediate 

containers ..............................................................................................36

5.3.2 Placement of identification text and address marking on exterior 

shipping containers, palletized unit loads, and unpacked items............37

5.3.2.1 Boxes and crates.............................................................................................37

5.3.2.2 Bales and cloth-covered bundles....................................................................38

5.3.2.3 Paper shipping sacks, bags, and textile/laminated textile bags......................39

5.3.2.4 Barrels, drums, and other cylindrical containers (including empty 

containers).............................................................................................40

5.3.2.5 Miscellaneous articles and unpacked items such as spools, reels, rods, 

coils of wire and cable, and paper- and cloth-wrapped rolls.................40

5.3.2.6 Unpacked major equipment (except unpacked vehicles)...............................41

5.3.2.7 Palletized unit load.........................................................................................42

5.3.2.8 Wood products...............................................................................................44

5.3.2.8.1 Bundled wood products..................................................................................44

5.3.2.8.2 Unstrapped (loose) wood products (piles, poles, etc.) ...................................44

5.3.2.8.3 Miscellaneous wood products in containers (doors, windows, and 

moldings)...............................................................................................45

5.3.2.9 Unpacked vehicles .........................................................................................45

5.3.2.10 Commercial-owned or Government-owned (or leased) shipping 

containers (SEAVAN) ..........................................................................46

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

CONTENTS

vii

PARAGRAPH PAGE

5.3.2.11 Full rail carload and full truckload shipments................................................47

5.3.2.12 Less than rail carload and less than truckload (LTL) shipments....................47

5.3.2.13 Tires (loose) ...................................................................................................47

5.3.2.14 Tubular products (loose) ................................................................................47

5.3.2.15 Tubular products (bundles and lifts) ..............................................................47

5.4 Identification bar code marking.................................................................48

5.4.1 Bar code data content specifications (non-ammunition) ...............................48

5.4.1.1 Identification bar code content for unit packs and intermediate containers...48

5.4.1.1.1 Identification 2D (PDF417) and linear (Code 39) bar code encoded serial 

numbers on unit packs and intermediate containers .............................49

5.4.1.1.2 Identification 2D (PDF417) bar code encoded unique item identifiers 

(UII) on unit packs and intermediate containers...................................49

5.4.1.2 Identification bar code content for exterior containers, palletized unit 

loads, and unpacked items.....................................................................50

5.4.1.2.1 Identification 2D (PDF417) and linear (Code 39) bar code encoded serial 

numbers on unpacked items, exterior shipping containers, and 

palletized unit loads...............................................................................51

5.4.1.2.2 Identification 2D (PDF417) bar code encoded unique item identifiers 

(UII) on unpacked items, exterior shipping containers, and 

palletized unit loads...............................................................................52

5.4.1.3 Assorted-items pack .......................................................................................52

5.4.1.4 Sets, kits, and outfits (SKO)...........................................................................53

5.4.1.5 Materiel destined for resale ............................................................................53

5.4.1.6 Protected cargo (controlled, sensitive, classified, and pilferable items)........53

5.4.2 Identification bar code labels / printing .........................................................53

5.4.2.1 Label stock requirements ...............................................................................53

5.4.2.2 Linear (Code 39) bar code printing specifications.........................................54

5.4.2.3 Two-dimensional (2D) (PDF417) bar code printing specifications...............54

5.4.2.4 Identification linear (Code 39)) marking basic configurations......................54

5.4.2.5 Identification linear (Code 39) bar code complex configurations..................54

5.4.2.6 Identification linear (Code 39) bar code configuration information..............54

5.4.3 General application requirements for identification bar codes and labels.....56

5.4.3.1 Applying identification bar codes on containers/surfaces (other than 

wood).....................................................................................................56

5.4.3.2 Applying identification bar code labels on wood containers/surfaces...........56

5.4.3.3 Identification 2D (PDF417) and linear (Code 39) bar code marking on 

transparent containers............................................................................56

5.4.4 Placement of identification 2D (PDF417) and linear (Code 39) bar code 

marking on unit packs and intermediate containers..............................56

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

CONTENTS

viii

PARAGRAPH PAGE

5.4.5 Placement of identification 2D (PDF417) and linear (Code 39) bar code 

marking on exterior shipping containers, palletized unit loads, and 

unpacked items......................................................................................58

5.4.5.2 Tag marking configurations for linear (Code 39) identification bar codes 

to be used with exterior shipping containers, palletized unit loads, 

and unpacked items...............................................................................59

5.4.5.3 2D (PDF417) bar code configuration.............................................................59

5.4.5.4 Label protection for exterior shipping containers, palletized unit loads, or 

unpacked items......................................................................................60

5.4.5.5 Boxes and crates under 10 cubic feet and those 10 cubic feet and over ........60

5.4.5.6 Bales, cloth-covered bundles, paper shipping sacks, bags and 

textile/laminated textile bags, rods, shafts, pipes, and coils of wire .....61

5.4.5.7 Barrels, drums, and other cylindrical containers............................................62

5.4.5.8 Reels or spools of cable, wire, and rope.........................................................63

5.4.5.9 Paper- and cloth-wrapped rolls ......................................................................63

5.4.5.10 Palletized unit loads .......................................................................................63

5.4.5.11 Unpacked major equipment (skidded or unskidded) .....................................64

5.4.5.12 Bundled wood products..................................................................................64

5.4.5.13 Small arms weapons container and palletized unit load labels......................64

5.5 Customer direct (formerly direct vendor delivery (DVD))......................64

5.6 Foreign Military Sales (FMS) marking requirements..............................65

5.6.1 Minimum package size ..................................................................................65

5.6.2 FMS assorted-items pack...............................................................................65

5.6.3 Contractor-originated FMS shipments...........................................................65

5.6.4 DoD originated FMS shipments ....................................................................66

5.7 Shipments to NATO countries or shipments using NATO carriers........66

5.8 Marking for specific commodities..............................................................66

5.8.1 Household goods............................................................................................67

5.8.2 Medical material ............................................................................................67

5.8.3 Subsistence.....................................................................................................67

5.8.4 Bulk cargo......................................................................................................67

5.8.5 Petroleum products ........................................................................................67

5.9 Passive radio frequency identification (RFID)..........................................67

5.9.1 Passive RFID tag technical requirements......................................................67

5.9.1.1 Passive RFID tag data specifications.............................................................67

5.9.1.2 Passive RFID tag frequency...........................................................................67

5.9.2 Passive RFID tag placement ..........................................................................67

5.9.2.1 Individual shipping container or palletized unit load.....................................68

5.9.2.2 Exterior containers within a palletized unit load............................................69

5.9.3 Tagging munitions/explosives with passive RFID ........................................69

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

CONTENTS

ix

PARAGRAPH PAGE

5.9.4 Electronic data interchange (EDI) transactions .............................................69

5.10 Special marks and labels.............................................................................69

5.10.1 Shelf-life marking ..........................................................................................69

5.10.2 Project code marking .....................................................................................71

5.10.3 Transportation special handling/protective services......................................72

5.10.4 Structural marking .........................................................................................72

5.10.5 Valuable and security items...........................................................................72

5.10.6 Special handling, including arrows and FRAGILE or DELICATE 

marking..................................................................................................72

5.10.6.1 Legend “USE NO HOOKS” ..........................................................................72

5.10.6.2 Arrows............................................................................................................73

5.10.7 Warranty marking ..........................................................................................73

5.10.8 Pictorial symbols for marking........................................................................73

5.10.9 Lag bolt caution marking...............................................................................74

5.10.10 Method 50 ......................................................................................................74

5.10.11 Magnetized material.......................................................................................75

5.10.12 Engineering or technical order changes or modifications..............................75

5.10.13 Lot, batch, or identification control numbers.................................................75

5.10.14 Set or assembly marking ................................................................................76

5.10.14.1 Set or assembly marking for component parts of disassembled enditems/products.......................................................................................76

5.10.14.2 Single stock-numbered and part-numbered sets ............................................77

5.10.14.3 Single stock-numbered and part-numbered sets with different stocknumbered parts......................................................................................77

5.10.15 Consolidation containers................................................................................78

5.10.16 Expedited handling - not mission capable supply (NMCS) and 999.............78

5.10.17 Center of balance and lifting and tiedown points ..........................................79

5.10.18 Load bearing areas and forklift entry points..................................................80

5.10.19 Axle weight marking......................................................................................80

5.10.20.1 ESD unit packs...............................................................................................80

5.10.20.2 ESD intermediate and exterior containers......................................................81

5.10.21 Materiel condition marking............................................................................81

5.10.22 Hardness critical item (HCI)..........................................................................82

5.11 Packing lists and documentation ................................................................82

5.11.1 Content packing lists for container/palletized load/unpacked items..............82

5.11.2 Shipment packing list and DD Form 1384 (TCMD) .....................................83

5.11.2.1 Shipment units containing a single DD Form 1348-1A.................................84

5.11.2.2 Shipment unit containing multiple DD Forms 1348-1A................................84

5.11.2.3 Alternate method of attaching DD Forms 1348-1A to fiberboard boxes.......85

5.11.2.4 Method of attaching accompanying documentation for shipments of 

vehicles..................................................................................................85

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

CONTENTS

x

PARAGRAPH PAGE

5.11.3 Exceptions to the use of exterior container documentation ...........................85

5.12 DD Form 1348-1A bar code data requirements........................................86

5.12.1 DD Form 1348-1A linear (Code 39) bar codes .............................................86

5.12.2 DD Form 1348-1A 2D (PDF417) bar code ...................................................87

5.13 Hazardous materials (HAZMAT) ..............................................................88

5.13.1 HAZMAT marking and labeling requirements..............................................88

5.13.2 Proper shipping name and identification number..........................................88

5.13.3 Marking and labeling of an assorted-items pack containing HAZMAT .......89

5.13.4 Marking and labeling of air and water shipments..........................................90

5.13.5 Identifying containers and packagings...........................................................90

5.13.5.1 DOT specification and UN Performance-Oriented Packaging 

certification marking .............................................................................90

5.13.5.2 Specialized containers....................................................................................90

5.13.5.3 DOT special permits (SPs).............................................................................92

5.13.5.4 Certification of equivalency (COE) ...............................................................92

5.13.5.5 Competent authority approval (CAA)............................................................92

5.13.5.6 Overpacked and assorted-items pack containers of HAZMAT .....................92

5.13.6 Documentation for HAZMAT.......................................................................92

5.13.6.1 Existing palletized unit loads of HAZMAT...................................................92

5.13.7 Flash point marking .......................................................................................93

5.13.8 Specific hazards.............................................................................................93

5.13.8.1 Asbestos .........................................................................................................93

5.13.8.2 Polychlorinated biphenyls (PCB)...................................................................93

5.13.9 Hazardous chemical warning label ................................................................93

5.13.10 Kits containing HAZMAT.............................................................................94

5.13.11 Radioactive material marking and labeling requirements .............................94

5.13.11.1 Nuclear Regulatory Commission (NRC) interior/storage container label .....94

5.13.11.2 Radioactive materials requiring an NRC label...............................................95

5.13.11.3 Transportation of radioactive materials..........................................................95

5.13.11.4 Exceptions to the use of radioactive material labels......................................95

5.14 Ammunition and explosives........................................................................96

5.14.1 Identification marking on unit packs, intermediate containers, and 

unpacked items......................................................................................96

5.14.2 Identification marking on unpacked items (not in a unit load) and 

exterior containers.................................................................................97

5.14.3 Identification marking on empty containers..................................................99

5.14.4 Identification marking on unit loads, to include palletized unit loads.........100

5.14.4.1 Content of unit load identification marking. ................................................101

5.14.4.2 Application of unit load identification marking...........................................101

5.14.5 Ammunition/Explosives Packaging Label marking requirements ..............104

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

CONTENTS

xi

PARAGRAPH PAGE

5.14.5.1 Label specifications......................................................................................104

5.14.6 Ammunition/Explosives Packaging Label 2D (PDF417) bar code data 

set ........................................................................................................106

5.14.6.1 Ammunition/Explosives Packaging Label bar code data structure..............106

5.14.6.2 Identification bar code human-readable information...................................109

5.14.6.3 Use of multiple Ammunition/Explosives Packaging Labels for large data 

requirements........................................................................................109

5.14.6.4 Location and application of the Ammunition/Explosives Packaging 

Label....................................................................................................110

5.14.7 Address marking ..........................................................................................111

5.14.8 Order of precedence.....................................................................................111

6. NOTES ..............................................................................................................111

6.1 Intended use................................................................................................111

6.2 Subject term (key word) listing ................................................................111

6.3 International standardization agreement implementation ....................112

6.4 Sizes of forms used.....................................................................................112

6.5 Unit pack desiccant label...........................................................................112

6.6 Chemical agent resistant coatings (CARC).............................................112

6.7 Changes from previous issue ....................................................................112

APPENDIX A TECHNICAL DETAILS FOR 2D (PDF417) BAR CODE

A.1. SCOPE ..............................................................................................................114

A.1.1 Scope............................................................................................................114

A.2. PROCEDURE ..................................................................................................114

A.2.1 Printing instructions..................................................................................114

A.2.2 Table A-I information................................................................................116

A.2.3 Tables A-II through A-V information......................................................117

A.2.4 Data syntax graphic ...................................................................................118

A.2.5 Encoding serial numbers...........................................................................119

A.2.5.1 Syntax business rules for encoding linked serial numbers and UIIs ...........119

A.2.5.2 Data syntax example ....................................................................................120

A.2.6 Table A-V Ammunition/Explosives Packaging Label specifications ....120

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

CONTENTS

xii

FIGURES PAGE

1. Example of unit pack, intermediate and exterior container identification 

text marking and 2D (PDF417) bar codes. .................................................23

2A. Generic MSL..................................................................................................29

2B. Unit move MSL..............................................................................................29

3. Placement of identification and address marking on boxes and crates..........38

4. Placement of identification and address marking on bales and clothcovered bundles. .........................................................................................39

5. Placement of identification and address marking on sacks and bags.............39

6. Placement of identification and address marking on barrels, drums, and 

other cylindrical containers.........................................................................40

7. Placement of identification and address marking on miscellaneous articles 

and unpacked items.....................................................................................41

8. Placement of identification and address marking on unpacked major 

equipment....................................................................................................42

9. Placement of identification and address marking on palletized unit loads. ...43

10. Placement of identification and address marking on bundled wood 

products.......................................................................................................44

11. Placement of identification and address marking on unstrapped (loose) 

wood products.............................................................................................45

12. Placement of identification and address marking on miscellaneous wood 

products in containers. ................................................................................45

13. Placement of identification and address marking on a marking board for 

an unpacked vehicle....................................................................................46

14. Placement of address marking (MSL on a SEAVAN)...................................47

15. Examples of typical linear (Code 39) bar code fields. ...................................50

16A. Linear (Code 39) bar code configurations. ....................................................55

16B. Complex linear (Code 39) bar code configurations. ......................................55

17. Bar code marking on unit packs.....................................................................57

18. Bar code marking on unit and intermediate containers..................................57

19. Typical linear (Code 39) bar code configurations for use on exterior 

containers and on tags.................................................................................58

20. Macro PDF417 bar codes on exterior container label....................................59

21. Exterior container bar code marking on boxes and crates under 10 cubic 

feet...............................................................................................................60

22. Exterior container bar code marking on boxes and crates 10 cubic feet 

and over.......................................................................................................61

23. Bar code tagged materiel................................................................................62

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

CONTENTS

xiii

FIGURES PAGE

24. Bar code marking on cylindrical containers...................................................62

25. Bar code marking on miscellaneous materiel. ...............................................64

26. Distribution of the DD Form 1348-1A for FMS shipments...........................66

27. DD Form 2477-1, Extended Shelf Life..........................................................70

28. Examples of special marking (shelf life, project code, and transportation 

special handling/protective services marking)............................................71

29. Examples of special marking (FRAGILE, UP, arrows, USE NO HOOKS 

and warranty marking)................................................................................73

30. Examples of pictorial symbols. ......................................................................74

31. Method 50 marking. .......................................................................................75

32. Examples of special marking (modification work order (MWO)) and lot 

number marking on unit packs and intermediate and exterior 

containers)...................................................................................................76

33. Examples of special marking (set or assembly marking, with component 

parts of disassembled items and single stock-numbered set marking). ......77

34. Single stock numbered item consisting of other stock numbered items in a 

single container. ..........................................................................................78

35. Examples of expedited handling labels..........................................................78

36. Center of balance, load bearing area, and lifting and tiedown points. ...........79

37. ESD sensitive devices attention symbols and labels......................................80

38. Packing list application. .................................................................................83

39. Sample of a DD Form 1348-1A, Issue Release/Receipt Document 

(IRRD). .......................................................................................................85

40. Sample of a DD Form 1348-1A, Issue Release/Receipt Document 

(IRRD), Continuation Page (page 1 of 3 and not actual size). ...................88

41. Example of exterior container HAZMAT marking and labeling 

requirements................................................................................................89

42. Example of UN Performance-Oriented Packaging certification marking 

for a fiberboard box. ...................................................................................91

43. Flash point marking........................................................................................93

44. Asbestos and PCB HAZMAT labels..............................................................94

45. NRC interior/storage container label. ............................................................95

46. Identification marking and the placement of ammo/explosives 

identification bar code labels on exterior rectangular containers. ..............98

47. Identification marking and the placement of ammo/explosives 

identification bar code labels for exterior cylindrical containers................98

48. Examples of ammo/explosives unit load identification and identification 

bar code marking.......................................................................................100

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

CONTENTS

xiv

FIGURES PAGE

49. Ammunition/Explosives Packaging Label...................................................105

50. Data nesting structure...................................................................................106

51. Examples of multiple Ammunition/Explosives Packaging Labels. .............110

A-1. 2D (PDF417) data columns..........................................................................114

A-2. 2D (PDF417) data syntax.............................................................................119

TABLES PAGE

I. UI/UM terms and abbreviations....................................................................... 7

II. Other abbreviations and acronyms................................................................... 7

III. Term definitions............................................................................................. 11

IV. Shelf-life codes. ........................................................................................... 113

A-I. 2D (PDF417) bar code data descriptions (Format 06)............................. 133

A-I. 2D (PDF417) bar code data descriptions (Format 07)............................. 135

A-II. MSL (generic) 2D (PDF417) bar code format............................................. 139

A-III. MSL (unit move) 2D (PDF417) bar code format. ....................................... 143

A-IV. Unit pack and container identification 2D (PDF417) bar code format........ 146

A-V. Ammunition/Explosives Packaging Label................................................... 148

CONCLUDING MATERIAL...........................................................................................151

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

1

1. SCOPE

1.1 Purpose. This standard provides the minimum requirements for uniform military 

marking for shipment and storage. Additional marking may be required by the contract or the 

cognizant activity.

1.2 Applicability. Shipment planning for supplies, equipment, and ammunition will be 

as specified in this standard. A marking is the numbers, letters, bar codes, labels, tags, symbols, 

or colors applied to provide identification and to expedite handling during shipment and storage.

2. APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS

2.1 General. The documents listed in this section are specified in sections 3, 4, and 5 

of this standard. This section does not include documents cited in other sections of this 

standard or recommended for additional information or as examples. While every effort has 

been made to ensure the completeness of this list, document users are cautioned that they 

meet all specified requirements documents cited in sections 3, 4, and 5 of this standard, 

whether or not they are listed.

2.2 Government documents.

2.2.1 Specifications, standards, and handbooks. The following specifications, 

standards, and handbooks form a part of this document to the extent specified herein. Unless 

otherwise specified, the issues of these documents are those cited in the solicitation or 

contract.

INTERNATIONAL STANDARDIZATION AGREEMENTS

STANAG 4281 - NATO Standard Marking for Shipment and Storage

STANAG 4329 - NATO Standard Bar Code Symbology

(Copies of Standardization Agreements (STANAGs) are available at http://nsa.nato.int/nsa/ or 

from the NATO Standardization Agency (NSA), North Atlantic Treaty Organization HQ,

Boulevard Leopold III B-1110, Brussels, Belgium.)

FEDERAL STANDARDS

FED-STD-595/33446 - Yellow, Flat or Lusterless

FED-STD-595/34094 - Green, Flat or Lusterless

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

2

DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE SPECIFICATIONS

MIL-DTL-4 - Tires and Inner Tubes (Non-Aircraft); Packaging of

MIL-DTL-53039 - Coating, Aliphatic Polyurethane, Single Component,

Chemical Agent Resistant

MIL-PRF-61002 - Pressure-Sensitive Adhesive Labels for Bar Coding

MIL-DTL-64159 - Coating, Water Dispersible Aliphatic Polyurethane,

Chemical Agent Resistant

DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE STANDARDS

MIL-STD-130 - Standard Practice for Identification Marking of U.S.

Military Property

MIL-STD-290 - Standard Practice, Packaging and Marking of Petroleum

and Related Products

MIL-STD-2073-1 - Standard Practice for Military Packaging

(Copies of these documents are available online at https://assist.dla.mil or 

http://quicksearch.dla.mil/.)

2.2.2 Other Government documents and publications. The following other Government 

documents and publications form a part of this document to the extent specified herein. Unless 

otherwise specified, issues are those cited in the solicitation.

CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS (CFR)

Title 10 CFR - Energy

Title 29 CFR - Labor

Title 40 CFR - Protection of Environment

Title 49 CFR - Transportation

FEDERAL ACQUISITION REGULATION (FAR)

DEFENSE FEDERAL ACQUISITION REGULATION SUPPLEMENT (DFARS)

(The CFR titles are available for download from http://www.ecfr.gov/. The FAR and DFARS 

are available for download at http://farsite.hill.af.mil/. The U.S. Government Printing Office 

web site is also available at http://www.gpo.gov/ for access to the documents.)

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

3

JOINT MILITARY

AFMAN 24-204 - Preparing Hazardous Materials

 (INTERSERVICE)/ for Military Air Shipments

 TM 38-250/

 NAVSUP PUB 505/

 MCO P4030.19J/

 DLAI 4145.3

DLAD 4145.41/ - Packaging of Hazardous Material

 AR 700-143/

 SECNAVINST 4030.55/

 AFJI 24-210 (I)/

 MCO 4030.40

TM 38-400/ - Storage and Materials Handling

 NAVSUP PUB 572/

 AFJMAN 23-210/

 MCO 4450.14/

 DLAM 4145.12

DTR 4500.9-R - Defense Transportation Regulation (DTR)

DoD REGULATIONS, MANUALS, AND HANDBOOKS

DoD 4100.39-M - Federal Logistics Information System (FLIS)

Procedures Manual

DoD 4140.27-M - Shelf-Life Management Manual

DEFENSE LOGISTICS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (DLMS)

DLM 4000.25-1 - Military Standard Requisitioning and Issue

Procedures (MILSTRIP)

(Joint military publications, DoD manuals, and DLMS manuals listed are available through the 

applicable Service/Agency publications distribution office. Non-DoD activities can obtain 

copies of the publications from the Defense Logistics Agency, ATTN: DSS-CV, 

8725 John J. Kingman Road, Fort Belvoir, VA 22060-6221. DLM 4000.25-1 and

DoD 4140.27-M are available electronically through http://www2.dla.mil/j-6/dlmso/elibrary/

manuals/publications.asp. DTR 4500.9-R is available through http://www.transcom.mil/dtr/

dtrHome/.)

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

4

RADIO FREQUENCY IDENTIFICATION (RFID) AND UNIQUE ITEM 

IDENTIFIER (UII) DOCUMENTS

DoD Suppliers’ Passive RFID Information Guide

DoD Guide to Uniquely Identifying Items

(Copies of the RFID Information Guide are available at http://www.acq.osd.mil/log/sci/ait.

html. The DoD Guide to Uniquely Identifying Items is available at

http://dodprocurementtoolbox.com/site/uidtools/.)

OTHER

Medical Marking Standard No. 1

DLA Troop Support Form 3556-Marking Instructions for Boxes, Sacks, and Unit

Loads of Perishable and Semiperishable Subsistence

(Copies of Medical Marking Standard No. 1 (MMS No. 1) may be obtained by contacting DLA 

Troop Support via email at dscp.packaging@dla.mil or online at http://www.landandmaritime.

dla.mil/downloads/packaging/mms1.pdf. Copies of DLA Troop Support Form 3556 are 

available online at https://www.troopsupport.dla.mil/subs/support/specs/forms/3556.pdf or 

from the Specification POC by calling 215-737-7772.)

2.3 Non-Government publications. The following documents form a part of this 

document to the extent specified herein. Unless otherwise specified, the issues of documents 

are those cited in the solicitation or contract.

ASTM INTERNATIONAL

ASTM D882 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin

Plastic Sheeting

ASTM D996 - Standard Terminology of Packaging and Distribution

Environments

ASTM D2582 - Standard Test Method for Puncture-Propagation Tear

Resistance of Plastic Film and Thin Sheeting

ASTM D3951 - Standard Practice for Commercial Packaging

ASTM D3953 - Standard Specification for Strapping, Flat Steel and

Seals

ASTM D4675 - Standard Guide for Selection and Use of Flat Strapping

Materials

ASTM D5445 - Standard Practice for Pictorial Markings for Handling

of Goods

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

5

ASTM INTERNATIONAL - Continued

ASTM D5486/ - Standard Specification for Pressure Sensitive Tape for

 D5486M Packaging, Box Closure, and Sealing

(Copies are available online at http://www.astm.org/Standard/ or from ASTM International, 100 

Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959.)

ACCREDITED STANDARDS COMMITTEE (ASC)

AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)

INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATION STANDARDS (ISO)

INTERNATIONAL ELECTROTECHNICAL COMMITTEE (IEC)

ANSI ASC X12.3 - Data Element Dictionary

ANSI MH10.8.1 - Linear Bar Code and Two-Dimensional Symbols Used 

in Shipping, Receiving, and Transport Applications

ANSI MH10.8.2 - Data Identifier and Application Identifier Standard

ANSI MH10.8.6 - Bar Codes and Two-Dimensional (2D) Symbols for

Product Packaging

ISO/IEC 15415 - Information technology – Automatic identification and

data capture techniques – Bar code print quality test

specification – Two-dimensional symbols

ISO/IEC 15416 - Information technology – Automatic identification and

data capture techniques – Bar code print quality test

specification – Linear symbols

ISO/IEC 15434 - Information technology – Automatic identification and

data capture techniques – Syntax for high-capacity 

ADC media

ISO/IEC 15438 - Information technology – Automatic identification and

data capture techniques – Bar code symbology 

specification – PDF417

ISO/IEC 16388 - Information technology – Automatic identification and

data capture techniques – Bar code symbology 

specification – Code 39

(Copies of ASC, ANSI, or ISO/IEC documents are available at http://www.iso.org or 

http://www.ansi.org or from the American National Standards Institute, 25 West 43rd Street, 4th

Floor, New York, NY 10036, and at http://www.mhi.org/ or from the Material Handling 

Industry, 8720 Red Oak Boulevard, Suite 201, Charlotte, NC 28217-3992.)

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

6

INTERNATIONAL AIR TRANSPORT ASSOCIATION (IATA)

Dangerous Goods Regulations

(Application for hard copies should be addressed to International Transport Association, 2000 

Peel Street, Montreal, Quebec, Canada H3A 2R4.)

INTERNATIONAL CIVIL AVIATION ORGANIZATION (ICAO)

Technical Instructions for the Safe Transportation of Dangerous Goods by Air

(Application for copies should be addressed to International Regulations Publishing 

and Distributing Organization, P.O. Box 60105, Chicago, IL 60660.)

INTERNATIONAL MARITIME ORGANIZATION (IMO)

International Maritime Dangerous Goods (IMDG) Code

(Application for copies should be addressed to International Maritime Organization, 4 

Albert Embankment, London SE1 7SR, England.)

2.4 Order of precedence. Unless otherwise noted herein or in the contract, in the 

event of a conflict between the text of this document and the references cited herein, the text 

of this document takes precedence. Nothing in this document, however, supersedes 

applicable laws and regulations unless a specific exemption has been obtained.

3. DEFINITIONS

General packaging definitions may be found in ASTM D996 and other referenced documents. 

Hazardous materials definitions are listed in Title 49 CFR, Parts 171 and 173, and in other 

related publications.

3.1 Abbreviations and acronyms. The following abbreviations and acronyms are used 

in this standard or are commonly associated with marking. Bar code abbreviations will be in 

accordance with the standards or documents cited for use.

a. Unit of issue (UI) or unit of measure (UM) abbreviations. Table I contains the 

recommended abbreviations for the human-readable translations of three different code sets 

used to describe the “quantity or basis for measurement” characteristic for an item. The three 

code sets (DLMS UI, DLMS UM, or ANSI ASC X12.3 Unit or Basis for Measurement) do not 

always use the same code for the same measured characteristic; therefore, the code must first be 

translated to the human-readable term which may then be printed using a Table I abbreviation. 

An abbreviation for package marking identified in a contract or purchase order takes precedence 

over the Table I list. Some of the abbreviations in Table I are for terms in addition to those 

listed in DoD 4100.39-M, Volume 10, Table 53 (UI) and Table 81 (UM) and in ANSI ASC 

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

7

X12.3 Data Element 355 (Unit or Basis for Measurement). In this standard, also see the Table 

III UI and UM definitions for DLMS conversion guide information. 

TABLE I. UI/UM terms and abbreviations.

Terms Abbr Terms Abbr Terms Abbr

Ampoule AM

Assembly AY

Bag BG

Bale BE

Ball BA

Bar BR

Barrel BL

Board foot BF

Bolt BO

Book BK

Bottle BT

Box BX

Bundle BD

Bushel BU

Cake CK

Can CN

Carboy CB

Carton CT

Cartridge CA

Case CS

Centimeter CM

Coil CL

Cone CE

Container CO

Cubic centimeter CC

Cubic foot CF

Cubic inch CI

Cubic yard CD

Cylinder CY

Dozen DZ

Drum DR

Each EA

Envelopes EV

Foot FT

Gallon GL

Gross GR

Group GP

Hank HK

Hundred HD

Inch IN

Jar JR

Jug JG

Keg KE

Kilogram KG

Kit KT

Length LG

Liter LI

Meal ME

Meter

Millimeter

MR

MM

Ounce OZ

Outfit OT

Package PG

Packet PZ

Pad PD

Pail PL

Pair PR

Piece PC

Pint PT

Plate PM

Pound LB

Quart QT

Ration RA

Ream RM

Reel RL

Roll RO

Set SE

Sheet SH

Shot SO

Skein SK

Skid SD

Spool SL

Square foot SF

Square yard SY

Stick SX

Strip SP

Thousand MX

Ton TN

Troy ounce TO

Tube TU

Unit UN

Vial VI

Yard YD

b. Other abbreviations and acronyms. See Table II.

TABLE II. Other abbreviations and acronyms.

2D - Two-dimensional

ADC - Automatic Data Capture

ADC - Approved DLMS Change

AFJI - Air Force Joint Instruction

AFMAN - Air Force Manual

AIT - Automatic Identification Technology

AR - Army Regulation

ARS - Agricultural Research Service

ANSI - American National Standards Institute

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

TABLE II. Other abbreviations and acronyms – Continued.

8

ASC - Accredited Standards Committee

ASCII - American Standard Code for Information Interchange

ASTM - ASTM International

Bq - Becquerel

C - Celsius

C&T - Clothing and Textiles

CAA - Competent Authority Approval

CAGE - Commercial and Government Entity

Cal - Caliber

CARC - Chemical Agent Resistant Coating

CASKO - Component, Assembly, Set, Kit, or Outfit

CCP - Consolidation and Containerization Point

CDIST - Consignee Distribution Code

CD-ROM - Compact Disk-Read Only Memory

CFR - Code of Federal Regulations

CLIN - Contract Line Item Number

COC - Certificate of Conformance

COE - Certification of Equivalency

COND - Condition Code

CONUS - Continental United States

CPI - Characters per Inch

CU - Cube

DCMA - Defense Contract Management Agency

DD - Department of Defense

DEI - Data Element Identifier

DFARS - Defense Federal Acquisition Regulation Supplement

DI - Data Identifier

DIC - Document Identifier Code

DIST - Distribution Code

DLA - Defense Logistics Agency

DLAI - Defense Logistics Agency Instruction

DLAM - Defense Logistics Agency Manual

DLM - Defense Logistics Manual

DLMS - Defense Logistics Management System

DoD - Department of Defense

DODAAC - Department of Defense Activity Address Code

DODIC - Department of Defense Identification Code

DODISS - Department of Defense Index of Specifications and Standards

DOT - Department of Transportation

DOT-E - Department of Transportation-Exemption

DOT-SP - Department of Transportation Special Permit

DTR - Defense Transportation Regulation, DTR 4500.9-R

DTS - Defense Transportation System

DVD - Direct Vendor Delivery

E3 - Electromagnetic Effects on the Environment

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

TABLE II. Other abbreviations and acronyms – Continued.

9

EDI - Electronic Data Interchange

ESD - Electrostatic Discharge

EXP - Expiration

F - Fahrenheit

FAR - Federal Acquisition Regulation

FDA - Food and Drug Administration

FED-STD - Federal Standard

FMS - Foreign Military Sales

FSC - Federal Supply Class

GBL - Government Bill of Lading

GSA - General Services Administration

HAZMAT - Hazardous Materials

HCI - Hardness Critical Item

HERO - Hazards of Electromagnetic Radiation to Ordnance

HHG - Household Goods

HMIS - Hazardous Materials Information System

IATA - International Air Transport Association

IAW - In Accordance With

ICAO - International Civil Aviation Organization

IEC - International Electrotechnical Committee

IMDG - International Maritime Dangerous Goods

IMO - International Maritime Organization

INSP - Inspection

IRRD - Issue Release/Receipt Document

ISO - International Organization for Standardization

IUID - Item Unique Identification

JHCS - Joint Hazard Classification System

kPa - Kilopascal

LTL - Less Than Truckload

MAPAC - Military Assistance Program Address Code

MAPAD - Military Assistance Program Address Directory

MCN - Management Control Number

MCO - Marine Corps Order

MFD - Manufactured

MFR - Manufacturer

MHI - Material Handling Industry

MHz - Megahertz

MIL-DTL - Military Detail Specification

MIL-PRF - Military Performance Specification

MIL-STD - Military Standard Practice

MILSTRIP - Military Standard Requisitioning and Issue Procedures

MSL - Military Shipping Label

MWO - Modification Work Order

NA - North American

NALC - Navy Ammunition Logistics Code

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

TABLE II. Other abbreviations and acronyms – Continued.

10

NATO - North Atlantic Treaty Organization

NAVSUP PUB - Navy Supply Systems Command Publication

NEW - Net Explosive Weight

NIIN - National Item Identification Number

NMCS - Not Mission Capable Supply

NOA - Notice of Availability

n.o.s. - Not Otherwise Specified

NRC - Nuclear Regulatory Commission

NSN - National/NATO Stock Number

OCONUS - Outside Continental United States

OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Administration

PCB - Polychlorinated Biphenyl

PDF417 - Portable Data File 417

PIIN - Procurement Instrument Identification Number

PN or P/N - Part Number

P/O - Part Of

POD - Port of Debarkation

POE - Port of Embarkation

PSN - Proper Shipping Name

QSTAG - Quadripartite Standardization Agreement

QTY - Quantity

QUP - Quantity per Unit Pack

RDD - Required Delivery Date

RIC - Routing Identifier Code

RF - Radio Frequency

RFID - Radio Frequency Identification

RORO - Roll On – Roll Off

SEAVAN - Commercial- or Government-owned (or –leased) Shipping Container

SECNAVINST - Secretary of the Navy Instruction

SER NO - Serial Number

SKO - Sets, Kits, and Outfits

SLC - Shelf-life Code

SLEP - Shelf Life Extension Program

STANAG - Standardization Agreement

TAC - Transportation Account Code

TCMD - Transportation Control and Movement Document

TCN - Transportation Control Number

TGBL - Through Government Bill of Lading

TM - Technical Manual (Army)

TP - Transportation Priority

TTN - Transportation Tracking Number

UB - Unaccompanied Baggage

UI - Unit of Issue

UIC - Unit Identification Code

UID - Unique Identification

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

TABLE II. Other abbreviations and acronyms – Continued.

11

UII - Unique Item Identifier

UIT - Unique Item Tracking

ULN - Unit Line Number

UM - Unit of Measure

UN - United Nations

UP - Unit Price

UPC - Universal Product Code

USD - United States Dollar

USTRANSCOM - United States Transportation Command

WP - White Phosphorus

WT - Weight

3.2 Term definitions. See Table III.

TABLE III. Term definitions.

463L System. Aircraft pallets, nets, tie down and coupling devices, facilities, handling 

equipment, procedures, and other components designed to interface with military and civilian 

aircraft cargo restraint systems. Though designed for airlift, system components may have to 

move intermodally via surface to support geographic combatant commander objectives. A 

loaded 463L System pallet is not considered to be a palletized unit load for marking of 

identification information in accordance with this standard.

Ammo package. For ordnance or materiel treated as ordnance, the term describes a unit 

load/palletized unit load, an exterior container within a unit load/palletized unit load, or it is an 

individual shipping container.

Assembled date. See Shelf life.

Assembly. An item of supply, composed of two or more related parts, that is capable of 

disassembly (for example, carburetor, powerpack, and intermediate frequency circuit amplifier).

Bar code. An array of rectangular bars and spaces in a predetermined pattern representing coded 

elements of data that can be automatically read and interpreted by automatic bar code reading 

devices.

Case. It is either an exterior container within a palletized unit load or it is an individual shipping 

container.

Classified items. See Protected cargo.

Cognizant activity. The activity having responsibility for a contract or jurisdiction over it. At a 

contractor’s facility, the cognizant activity is the administrative contracting officer or the 

procuring contracting officer. Contractor personnel do not qualify as the cognizant activity. At 

DoD installations, this is the head of the agency, bureau, command, or Service that is responsible 

for storage and shipment.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

TABLE III. Term definitions – Continued.

12

Commercial and Government Entity (CAGE) code. A five-position alpha-numeric code 

applicable to all activities that have produced or are producing items used by the Federal 

Government and to Government activities which control design or are responsible for 

development of certain specifications, drawings, or standards. This is the US version of the 

NATO CAGE code (NCAGE).

Common-user transportation. Transportation and transportation services provided on a common 

basis for two or more Department of Defense (DoD) agencies, and authorized non-DoD 

agencies. Common-user assets are under the combatant command (command authority) of the 

Commander, U.S. Transportation Command (TRANSCOM), excluding Service-unique or 

theater-assigned assets.

Consignee (receiver). Party to whom materiel is shipped and whose name and address appear in 

the “ULTIMATE CONSIGNEE OR MARK FOR” block of the shipping label.

Consignor (shipper). Party who ships materiel and whose name and address appear in the 

“FROM” block of the shipping label.

Consolidated shipment unit. A shipment unit with multiple line items, or a shipment unit 

containing other shipment units, or a shipment unit with a mix of line items and other shipment 

units.

Consolidation container. A container used to consolidate more than one line item into a single 

shipping container to be shipped to one destination, but not necessarily to one addressee.

Content Level Detail. Content level detail includes those data elements that describe the asset or 

item being shipped plus the data elements necessary to minimally identify each level of a 

complete shipment entity. The most basic entity is a single box or unpacked item governed by a 

shipment unit identifier. The data elements are specifically described in DTR 4500.9-R, Defense 

Transportation Regulation.

Contract Line Item Number (CLIN). A four to six-digit number used to identify each delivery 

date and/or destination’s quantity in the contract schedule.

Contract number, or purchase order number, or procurement instrument identification number 

(PIIN). The acquisition instrument identification number appearing on the acquisition document. 

Some DoD contracts refer to the contract or purchase order number, together with the delivery 

order number, as the PIIN.

Controlled items. See Protected cargo.

Consolidated shipment unit. See Shipment unit.

Cured date. See Shelf life.

Customer direct. Customer direct (formerly direct vendor delivery (DVD)) is a streamlined 

distribution method that requires vendor delivery directly to a customer or Defense 

Transportation System (DTS) transshipment point. Many customer direct efforts include a 

customer-transparent interface with military standard requisitioning and issue procedures 

(MILSTRIP).

Data area/field title. See Human-readable information.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

TABLE III. Term definitions – Continued.

13

Defense Transportation System (DTS). That portion of the nation’s transportation infrastructure 

that supports DoD transportation common-user transportation needs across the range of military 

operations. It consists of those common-user military and commercial assets, services, and 

systems organic to, contracted for, or controlled by the DoD.

Department of Defense Activity Address Code (DODAAC). A distinct six-position 

alphanumeric code assigned to identify specific units, activities, or organizations as found in the 

Department of Defense Activity Address Directory.

Definitive UI. See Unit of issue (UI).

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) sensitive devices. Electrical and electronic devices that are 

susceptible to damage from electrostatic discharge (static electricity). These devices include, but 

are not limited to, integrated circuits and discrete devices (e.g., resistors, transistors, and other 

semiconductor devices).

Expiration date. See Shelf life.

Exterior container. A container, bundle, or assembly that is sufficient by reason of material, 

design, and construction to protect unit packs and intermediate containers and their contents 

during shipment and storage. It can be a unit pack or a container with a combination of unit 

packs or intermediate containers. An exterior container may or may not be used as a shipping 

container.

Field titles. See Human-readable information.

Free text. See Human-readable information.

Generic military shipping label (MSL). A term used to identify the MSL used for cargo other 

than unit move cargo documented in accordance with DTR 4500.9-R Part III or other than 

personal property cargo documented in accordance with DTR Part IV. Generic MSL use

procedures are in DTR Part II.

Government Bill of Lading (GBL). A Government document used to procure transportation and 

related services from commercial carriers.

Hardness critical item (HCI). Items at any assembly level which are mission critical and could 

be designed, repaired, manufactured, installed, or maintained for normal operation and yet 

degrade a system’s survivability in a nuclear environment if hardness were not considered. HCIs 

will only be replaced with other HCI-approved items.

Hazardous materials. An item of supply consisting of materiel that because of its quantity, 

concentration, or physical, chemical, or infectious characteristics, may either cause or 

significantly contribute to an increase in mortality or an increase in serious, irreversible, or 

incapacitating reversible illness; or pose a substantial present or potential hazard to human health 

or the environment when improperly treated, stored, transported, disposed of, or otherwise 

managed. This includes all items listed as hazardous in Titles 29, 40, 49 CFR and other 

applicable modal regulations effective at the time of shipment.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

TABLE III. Term definitions – Continued.

14

Human-readable information. Information intended to be conveyed to a person. Humanreadable information in lieu of machine-readable information is commonly referred to as text. 

Human-readable information applications in association with bar code or two-dimensional 

symbol are identified as:

a. Human-readable interpretation. An exact, literal interpretation of the encoded bar 

code data presented in a human-readable font.

b. Human translation. Human-readable information provided within proximity of the 

machine-readable bar codes/symbols representing portions of the encoded information with the 

respective data field titles not encoded in the bar code/symbols.

c. Free text. Human-readable information other than what is encoded in the machinereadable bar codes/symbols.

d. Data area/field titles. The titles identify areas/fields comprised of information in 

machine-readable or human-readable form.

Inner packaging. Inner packaging means a packaging for which an outer packaging is required 

for transport. It does not include the inner receptacle of a composite packaging. (Title 49 CFR)

Inspect/test date. See Shelf life.

Interior container. A container that is inside another container. It may be a unit pack or an 

intermediate container that is placed inside an exterior container or shipping container.

Intermediate container. A wrap, box, or bundle containing two or more unit packs of identical 

items. Normally one or more intermediate packages will be bundled to make a shipping 

container.

Item. A single hardware article or single unit formed by a grouping of subassemblies, 

components, or constituent parts (as specified in MIL-STD-130).

Item description (nomenclature). The name and description of an item as it appears in the 

contract, purchase order, requisition, or Issue Release/Receipt Document (DD Form 1348-1A).

Item unique identification (IUID). See Unique identification (UID).

IUID equivalent. See Unique identification (UID).

Light (lite) box. For ammunition and explosive applications, a light (lite) box is a standard box 

or container, specified by item packaging drawing, containing less than the standard NSN unit 

pack quantity for the item.

Loose or unpacked item. An identifiable item that is unencumbered by a tie, wrap, or container.

Lot, batch, or identification control number. That series of numbers or letters, or both, that are 

established to record the production and control of the product.

Manufactured date. See Shelf life.

Military Standard Requisitioning and Issue Procedures (MILSTRIP). A uniform procedure 

established by the DoD for use within the DoD to govern requisition and issue of materiel within 

standardized priorities.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

TABLE III. Term definitions – Continued.

15

Modification work order (MWO). Official publication providing authentic and uniform 

instructions for the alteration and modification of existing materiel, including joint Service 

publications published as retrofit orders.

Multipack. An exterior container or palletized unit load packed with assorted line items and 

marked as a “MULTIPACK” (see 5.1.2.1.b).

National/NATO stock number (NSN). A 13-digit number that is divided into two parts, the 

Federal supply class (FSC) number and the national item identification number (NIIN). The 

FSC is the first four digits of the NSN that establishes its relationship to other items within the 

same FSC. The NIIN is the last nine digits of the NSN. The first two digits of the NIIN identify 

the country assigning the two numbers referred to as the National Codification Bureau codes. 

The remaining seven are serially assigned numbers. When shown in the contract/requisition, the 

NSN includes any prefixes and suffixes.

Nomenclature. See Item description (nomenclature).

Nondefinitive UI. See Unit of issue (UI).

Ordnance. Explosives, chemicals, pyrotechnics, and similar stores, e.g., bombs, guns and 

ammunition, flares, smoke, or napalm. Source: JP 3-15

Pack/Package. An instance of packing. For ammunition, explosives, or materiel treated as 

ordnance, the term describes a unit load/palletized unit load, an exterior container within a unit 

load/palletized unit load, or it is an individual shipping container.

Packaging. A means of specifying the preservation and packing that a given item requires to 

ensure that it is not degraded during shipment and storage.

a. Preservation. Application of materials and/or methods designed to protect an item 

during shipment, handling, indeterminate storage, and distribution to consignees worldwide. 

Military methods of preservation are defined in MIL-STD-2073-1. The date of preservation is 

the date the item was placed in the unit pack.

b. Packing. Application of any exterior protective methods, materials, or devices to 

assure the integrity of the item. The assembly of items into a unit pack, an intermediate or 

exterior container, or a palletized unit load.

c. Packed date. See Shelf life.

Packing. See Packaging.

Palletized unit load. A quantity of items, packed or unpacked, arranged on a pallet in a specified 

manner and secured, strapped, or fastened on the pallet so that the whole palletized load is 

handled as a single unit. A palletized or skidded load is not considered to be a shipping 

container. A loaded 463L System pallet is not considered to be a palletized unit load for marking 

of identification information in accordance with this standard. Also see Unit load.

Parcel post. Any packed materiel placed in United States Postal Service channels.

Passive radio frequency identification (RFID) tag. An RFID device which modulates and 

reflects a carrier signal from an interrogator. Passive RFID tags operate without a separate 

external power source and obtain operating power generated from the reader.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

TABLE III. Term definitions – Continued.

16

Pilferable items. See Protected cargo.

Polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB). An organic chemical, synthetically manufactured and used 

primarily in electrical equipment. It is harmful to human health and the environment.

Port of debarkation (POD). An authorized point where shipments enter a country, either into the 

continental United States (CONUS) or into a foreign country.

Port of embarkation (POE). An authorized point where shipments leave a country, either from 

CONUS or from a foreign country.

Preservation. See Packaging.

Project code. A three-position alphanumeric code which identifies plans, programs, and 

exercises.

Proper shipping name (PSN). The name of a hazardous material shown in Roman print (not 

italics) in Title 49 CFR, Part 172 and in other hazardous materials related publications.

Protected cargo. Items that are required to be secured, identified, segregated, handled, or 

accounted for in such a manner as to ensure their safeguard or integrity. Protected cargo is 

subdivided into classified, controlled, pilferable, and sensitive items.

a. Classified items. Items that are of a classified nature and have a security 

classification.

b. Controlled items. Items that require additional control and security as prescribed in 

various regulations and statutes. Controlled items include money, negotiable instruments, 

narcotics, registered mail, precious metal alloys, ethyl alcohol, and objects that could be utilized 

in the illegal use of drugs (i.e. hypodermic needles).

c. Pilferable items. Items that are vulnerable to theft because of their ready resale 

potential, such as cigarettes, alcoholic beverages, cameras, electronic equipment, and clothing 

and textiles.

d. Sensitive items. Items such as small arms, ammunition, and explosives with the 

potential for use during civil disturbances, domestic unrest, or if used by criminal elements. In 

the hands of militant or revolutionary organizations, these items present a definite threat to 

public safety.

Quantitative expression. See Unit of issue (non-definitive UI).

Quantity per unit pack (QUP). The quantity of items in a unit pack given in the terminology of 

the definitive unit of issue. When a nondefinitive unit of issue is assigned to the stock item, it 

may be further quantified by a unit of measure and measurement quantity. Also see Unit of issue 

(UI).

Radio Frequency Identification (RFID). An automatic identification and data capture technology 

comprised of one or more reader/interrogators and one or more RF transponders in which data 

transfer is achieved by means of suitably modulated inductive or radiating electromagnetic 

carriers.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

TABLE III. Term definitions – Continued.

17

Radioactive material. Any material, or combination of materials, which spontaneously emit 

ionizing radiation, including materials that possess artificial, induced, and natural radioactivity. 

Materials in which the estimated specific activity is not greater than 70 Bq grams (0.002 

microcuries/gram) of material, and in which the radioactivity is essentially uniformly distributed, 

are not considered to be radioactive materials.

Required delivery date (RDD). The day of the year (e.g., 087, 198, etc.) specified on the 

requisition when materiel is required by the requisitioner or the consignee.

Security assistance. A group of programs authorized by the Foreign Assistance Act of 1961, as 

amended, and the Arms Export Control Act, as amended, or other related statutes by which the 

United States provides defense articles, military training, and other defense-related services by 

grant, credit, cash sale, lease, or loan in furtherance of national policies and objectives. Foreign 

Military Sales (FMS) is one of the security assistance programs.

Sensitive items. See Protected cargo.

Serial number. An assigned designation that provides a means of identifying a specific 

individual item.

Serialized item management. Identifies populations of select items (parts, components, and end 

items); marks all items in each population with a unique identifier; and generates, collects, and 

analyzes maintenance, logistics, and usage data about each specific item, as described in DoDI 

4151.19.

Shelf life. The total period of time beginning with the date of manufacture, cure, assembly, or

pack and terminated by the date by which the item must be placed into service (expiration date) 

or subjected to inspection, test, and/or restoration (inspect/test date). Shelf life should not be 

confused with service life.

a. Assembled date. The date items or parts are assembled into components, assemblies, 

sets, kits, or outfits (CASKO), or the date various CASKOs are assembled into a larger unit.

b. Cured date. The date the item or materiel was altered industrially, as to vulcanize 

(rubber) or to treat (synthetic elastomers) with heat or chemicals to make them infusible.

c. Expiration date. The date by which nonextendible shelf-life items (Type I) will be 

discarded as no longer suitable for issue/use.

d. Inspect/test date. The date by which extendible shelf-life items (Type II) will be 

subjected to visual inspection, certified laboratory tests, or restoration.

e. Manufactured date. The date the item, materiel, or commodity was fabricated, 

processed, produced, or formed for use. For drugs, chemicals, and biologicals, the date of 

manufacture for products submitted to the Food and Drug Administration (FDA) for certification 

prior to release is the date of the official certification notice. For products manufactured under 

the license of the Agricultural Research Service (ARS), the date manufactured conforms to the 

definition established by the ARS. The date of manufacture will not be shown for medical items 

having expiration dates.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

TABLE III. Term definitions – Continued.

18

f. Packed date. For subsistence items only, the packed date will be the date on which the 

item was packaged in the unit pack, regardless of the date of packing, shipping, or additional 

processing.

Shelf-life code (SLC). A code assigned to a shelf-life item to identify the number of months of 

original shelf life and also whether the original shelf life is nonextendible (Type I) or extendible 

(Type II).

Shelf-life item. An item of supply that possesses deteriorative or unstable characteristics to the 

degree that a storage time period is assigned to ensure that the item will perform satisfactorily in 

service.

a. Type I shelf-life item. An individual item of supply which is determined through an 

evaluation of technical test data and/or actual experience, to be an item with a definite nonextendible period of shelf life. One exception is Type I medical shelf-life items that may be 

extended if they have been accepted into and passed testing for extension in the DoD/FDA ShelfLife Extension Program (SLEP).

b. Type II shelf-life item. An individual item of supply having an assigned shelf-life 

time period that may be extended after completion of visual inspection/certified laboratory test, 

and/or restorative action.

Shipment unit. A shipment unit has a unique transportation control number (TCN) assigned to it 

for accounting, control, and visibility throughout its life cycle in the Defense Transportation 

System. It may be divided into partial or split increments for movement on different 

conveyances; and it is one of the following:

a. Single shipment unit (one item). A single line item of supply destined to one 

consignee; or,

b. Single shipment unit (multiple items). Two or more compatible line items having the 

same consignee/destination, commodity code, and transportation account code; shipped together 

in the same container, or the same conveyance, or the same SEAVAN (without regard to 

commodity code), or as loose packages banded together into a single piece, or as a set or 

assembly; or,

c. Consolidated shipment unit. Two or more compatible shipment units aggregated into 

a consolidated shipment unit.

Shipping container. An exterior container which meets carrier regulations and is of sufficient 

strength, by reason of material, design, and construction, to be shipped safely without further 

packing (e.g., wooden boxes or crates, fiber and metal drums, and corrugated and solid 

fiberboard boxes).

Single shipment unit (one item or multiple items). See Shipment unit.

Supply condition codes for shelf-life items. Specific codes that provide standard criteria at the 

wholesale/retail level and designate the remaining shelf life of an item from dates of 

manufacture, cure, assembly, packing (subsistence only), inspect, test, or restoration action. The 

codes indicate the classification of materiel that reflects its readiness for issue and use or to 

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

TABLE III. Term definitions – Continued.

19

identify the action underway to change the status of materiel. DLM 4000.25-1 provides a 

complete listing of these codes and their definitions as related to shelf-life items/materiel.

Transportation control number (TCN). The single standard shipment identification number for 

all DoD-sponsored movements (i.e., materiel and equipment and all vendor-shipping transactions 

involving DoD materiel). The TCN is a 17-position alphanumeric data element assigned to 

control a shipment unit through the transportation system (to include CONUS shipments, 

shipments entering the DTS, and commercial systems).

Transportation tracking number (TTN). The TTN is a unique, serialized 17-digit number 

generated by a shipping application for specific unit move shipments. The TTN is derived from 

the unique 13-digit transportation tracking account number generated for each unit line number 

(ULN) created in an operations plan during execution. The TTN generation process is scheduled 

for implementation subject to application system funding.

Unique identification (UID). See following subtopics, the DoD Guide to Uniquely Identifying 

Items, and MIL-STD-130.

a. Item unique identification (IUID). A system of establishing unique item identifiers 

within the DoD by assigning a machine-readable character string or number to a discrete item, 

which serves to distinguish it from other like and unlike items.

b. Unique item identifier (UII). A globally unique and unambiguous identifier that 

distinguishes an item from all other like and unlike items. The UII is derived from a UII data set 

of one or more data elements. The term includes an IUID equivalent.

c. UID equivalent. Item unique identification methods in commercial use that have been 

recognized by DoD for use as unique item identifiers (UIIs).

Unique item tracking (UIT). A program within DoD for tracking selected items to maintain 

visibility of each uniquely identified asset for the primary purpose of inventory control and/or 

engineering analysis. (DLM 4000.25-1)

Unit load. For ammunition, explosives, ordnance, or materiel treated as ordnance, an assemblage 

of two or more items (in or out of ammo packages) designed to permit handling these items as a 

single entity during transportation and storage. Also see Palletized unit load.

Unit move cargo. A descriptive term used to identify cargo documented in accordance with 

DTR 4500.9-R Part III procedures.

Unit of issue (UI) – see 3.1.a. The UI is a standard or basic quantity that is expressed as a unit 

and indicated in a requisition, contract, or order as the minimum quantity issued (bottle, can, 

dozen, each, foot, gallon, gross, pair, pound, yard, etc.) and to which a unit price is ascribed. The 

UI codes are specified in DoD 4100.39-M, Volume 10, Table 53. A DLA Logistics 

Management Standards updated list of UI code definitions and their respective ANSI ASC X12.3 

Data Element 355 (Unit or Basis for Measurement) codes are specified in the Unit of Issue and 

Purchase Unit Conversion Guide (Unit or Basis for Measurement) (DoD Code Sequence) at 

http://www2.dla.mil/j-6/dlmso/eApplications/LogDataAdmin/dlmsansiconverguides.asp.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

TABLE III. Term definitions – Continued.

20

a. Definitive UI. A definitive UI is a type of UI designation that indicates an exact 

quantity of volume, linear measurement, weight, or count (e.g., assembly, each, kit, set, foot, 

pound, gallon, etc).

b. Non-definitive UI. A non-definitive UI is a type of UI designation that does not 

indicate an exact quantity of volume, linear measurement, weight, or count (e.g., drum, can, box, 

or roll). When a non-definitive UI is specified, it is usually accompanied by a UI quantitative 

expression (e.g., 1 RO (150 ft) or 1 RL (50 ft)). The quantitative expression specifies the content 

(decimal locator, quantity, and unit of measurement) of the non-definitive unit of issue assigned 

to an item of supply. (DoD 4100.39-M)

Unit of measure (UM) – see 3.1.a. The narrative indicating the recognizable physical 

measurements used in the application of DoD 4100.39-M conversion criteria. The UM codes are 

specified in DoD 4100.39-M, Volume 10, Table 81.

Unit pack. The first tie, wrap, or container applied to a single item, or a quantity thereof, or to a 

group of items of a single stock number, preserved or unpreserved, which constitutes a complete 

or identifiable package.

Unpacked item. An identifiable item that is unencumbered by a tie, wrap, container.

Warranty marking. Marking that applies when a shipment contains items with a service life 

defined in a specific amount of hours, a specific end date, or a specific operating time.

4. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

4.1 Marking unit packs, intermediate and exterior containers, unit loads, palletized unit 

loads, and loose or unpacked items. Marking shall be accomplished by any means that provides 

the required degree of legibility and durability. Marking may be applied by tagging, stenciling, 

stamping, machine printing, or labeling (using preprinted labels). Although machine printing is 

preferred, hand printing may be used for marking packs and containers if permitted by the 

cognizant activity. Hand printing is not authorized for ammunition containers.

4.2 Marking, marking materials, and methods.

4.2.1 Marking materials. Marking materials used shall be those materials specified in 

this standard or alternate choices approved by the cognizant activity. Contractors may obtain the 

DoD-unique labels (e.g. DD Form 250) discussed herein from commercial sources after 

obtaining samples from either the procuring activity or the local Defense Contract Management 

Agency (DCMA) office. Also see http://www.dtic.mil/whs/directives/infomgt/forms/index.htm.

4.2.1.1 Waterproofing materials used as protective coatings. Waterproofing materials 

such as spar varnish, acrylic coating compound, sealing compound, label adhesive, polyurethane 

coatings, and pressure-sensitive tape that does not restrict or preclude legibility or readability of 

the package marking, shall be used as protective coatings on container marking.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

21

4.2.1.2 Stencil-marking material. Any opaque, nonfading, fast drying, weather resistant 

stencil ink, lacquer, paint, or enamel shall be used for stencil marking. MIL-DTL-64159 or 

MIL-DTL-53039 paint shall be used for stenciling containers that have a chemical agent resistant 

coating (CARC) applied to them.

4.2.1.3 Obliterating lacquer, enamel, or paint. Any quick-drying, opaque lacquer, ink, 

enamel, or paint that approximates the color of the container shall be used for the obliteration of 

marking. When obliterating CARC painted marking on metal reusable containers, paint 

conforming to MIL-DTL-64159 or MIL-DTL-53039, Green 383, paint chip color 34094 or Tan

686A, paint chip color 33446 of FED-STD-595, shall be used. Green shall be used on green or 

green camouflage and tan shall be used on tan or desert sand camouflage colored containers.

4.2.1.4 Lithographing, embossing, roller coating, stamping, and inkjet marking. When 

lithographing, embossing, or roller coating of marking is authorized, commercial enamels, 

lacquers, or inks in the color specified shall be used. When stamping or inkjet marking is 

specified, commercial waterproof and petroleum-resistant inks, in the color specified, shall 

maintain sufficient durability during exposure to field service.

4.2.2 Labels, pressure-sensitive, water-resistant. Labels shall be of a water-resistant 

grade of paper, film, fabric, or plastic, coated on one side with water-insoluble, permanent type 

adhesive. The adhesive shall adhere to metal, plastic, aluminum or fiberboard surfaces under 

high and low temperatures. Labels shall have a finish suitable for printing and writing on with 

ink without feathering or spreading, be capable of withstanding normal handling and storage 

conditions, and remain securely in position. Application specific performance criteria and 

durability requirements to ensure functionality in various climatic environments should be 

tailored, if required, using MIL-PRF-61002. MIL-PRF-61002 can be used as an acquisition tool 

when labels presently being used are not performing satisfactorily or when new conditions or 

applications require special label stock for those particular situations. Identification bar code 

labels on exterior containers, palletized unit loads, and unpacked items shall meet the 

requirements of 5.4.2.1.

4.2.2.1 Use of labels. Pressure-sensitive labels that meet the requirements of 4.2.2 may 

be used on containers/surfaces other than wood without prior surface preparation. When 

pressure-sensitive labels are used on wood containers/surfaces, the labeling area shall be suitably 

prepared to ensure adhesion.

4.2.2.2 Protective coating of labels. If labels for exterior containers, palletized unit 

loads, and unpacked items, except vehicles and related items, are not inherently waterproof, they 

shall be waterproofed by coating the entire outer surface of the label with a transparent, 

waterproofing material (see 4.2.1.1). Exterior identification bar code labels shall be protected in 

accordance with 5.4.5.4.

4.2.2.3 Affixing and securing labels (except for labels on vehicles and related 

equipment). Labels that are other than pressure-sensitive shall be securely affixed with a waterresistant label adhesive or a transparent, waterproof, pressure-sensitive tape.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

22

4.2.3 Shipping tags. Shipping tags are recommended for use when it is impractical to 

stencil mark or apply a label on the container or unpacked item. Shipping tags of metal, cloth, 

plastic, paper, or other durable material shall be used to provide the required marking when 

specified herein or when it is impractical to stencil mark or apply a label on a container or 

unpacked item. Separate tags shall be used for identification and address marking.

4.2.4 Water-resistant envelopes. Water-resistant envelopes shall be used for packing 

lists, serial number lists, and materiel release/receipt documents, etc. Securely affix or fasten the 

envelope to the package or container, palletized unit load, or unpacked item.

4.2.5 Conditions of surfaces to be marked. All surfaces to be marked shall be in a 

condition so that the marking remains permanent, legible, and nonfading. All marks not 

applicable to the shipment shall be obliterated. When shipping containers are consolidated into 

container vans for shipment to an ultimate consignee, obliteration of current address marking is 

not required.

4.2.6 Marking legibility, durability, and color. Marking shall be clear, legible, durable,

non-fading, and sufficient to withstand normal exposure to environmental and handling 

conditions to which the package/container might be subjected. Bar code print quality shall 

conform to 5.4.2. Unless instructed otherwise in the contract, purchase order, or drawing, 

packages constructed of wood or lightly colored materials shall be marked using a black color 

and packages constructed from green or black materials shall be marked using a white or yellow 

color.

4.2.7 Marking board or marking panel. Marking shall be applied to marking boards and 

marking panels as specified herein or in the contract or purchase order.

4.2.8 Size of marking. Unless otherwise specified herein or by the cognizant activity, 

the lettering/marking shall be in capital letters of equal height, clearly visible, and the largest size 

practical for the package size within the acceptable range. When marking space permits, 

stenciled or pre-printed marking shall be not less than 0.09 inch (2.3 mm).

5. DETAILED REQUIREMENTS

NOTES:

1. Ammunition and explosives identification marking exclusions to the general requirements of

this section are as noted.

2. A loaded RORO trailer/vehicle, loaded SEAVAN, loaded 463L System pallet, or other 

unitized load documented as a shipment unit consolidation in accordance with DTR 4500.9-R 

Part II Appendix M or unit move cargo documented in accordance with DTR 4500.9-R Part III 

are exempt from the identification marking requirements in this standard.

5.1 Identification text marking (for ammo/explosives – see 5.14). Identification marking 

consists of text marking and bar code marking. Identification marking is intended to provide 

receipt process information for vendor sourced material and storage process information for 

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

23

accurate stock accounting. Figure 1 shows an example of the content and approximate

placement of the identification text marking and the alternative identification bar code marking 

on unit packs, intermediate containers, and exterior containers. Unless specifically exempted in 

the contract or solicitation, or this standard, the marking shall be applied to all DoD and 

contractor-originated or vendor-originated shipments.

NOTES:

1. Identification bar code marking is specified in 5.4.

2. Marking materials, methods, and size of the identification text is specified in 4.2. The exact 

placement of identification text and identification bar code marking on specific containers may 

vary in configuration and format from those shown in the figures in 5.3.

3. Hazardous item identification marking is specified herein and in 5.13.

4. Ammunition and explosives identification marking is specified in 5.14.

2910-0 0-456-7416

CAGE 57685

PN 341

CARBURETOR

1 EA

DAA625-0 3-C-1056

M41-4/02

MFD DATE 4/01

EXP DATE 4/16

SER NO 1151

ID DATA

INCLUDES UII(s)

2910-0 0-456-7416

CAGE 57685

PN 341

CARBURETOR

2 EA

DAA625-0 3-C-1056

M41-4/02

MFD DATE 4/01

EXP DATE 4/16

SER NO 1151

1153

ID DATA

INCLUDES UII(s)

2910-00-456-7416

CAGE 57685

PN 341

4 EA

DAA625-03-C-1056

M41-4/02

MFD DATE 4/01

EXP DATE 4/16

WT 14

SER NO 1151

1153

1155

1157

ID DATA

INCLUDES UII(s)

UNIT 

PACK

INTERMEDIATE

CONTAINER

EXTERIOR

CONTAINER

NOTE: For hazardous marking, see 5.13. Linear bar codes are optional when the 2D 

(PDF417) bar code includes the identification data.

FIGURE 1. Example of unit pack, intermediate and exterior container

identification text marking and 2D (PDF417) bar codes.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

24

5.1.1 Identification text marking on unit packs and intermediate containers. Unless 

specifically exempted in the contract or solicitation, the following identification text information 

shall be marked on all unit packs and intermediate containers, in the order listed. This 

requirement applies to all unit packs and intermediate containers repacked for shipment by 

military installations. Additional identification marking may be required by the contract and 

shall be placed either below the identification text marking or in a conspicuous location on the 

identification-marked side of the container. Unit packs used as exterior containers at the time of 

packaging shall be marked in accordance with 5.1.2.

a. NSN/NATO stock number. The in-the-clear NSN text, if applicable, shall include 

spaces or dashes and any prefix or suffix specified in the contract or solicitation. If no NSN is 

assigned, the blank line may be omitted.

NOTE: The encoded NSN in the linear (Code 39) or 2D (PDF417) bar codes and humanreadable interpretation below the linear (Code 39) bar code, as applicable, shall not include 

spaces or dashes, unless otherwise specified in the contract or solicitation.

b. CAGE code. The CAGE code of the company awarded the contract for the item 

being shipped. The CAGE code shall be preceded by the abbreviation “CAGE”.

c. Part number. If a PN is specified in the contract or order, then only that PN shall be 

shown. The PN specified in the contract may be the PN assigned by the Government procuring 

activity, or it may be the PN of the actual manufacturer or the PN assigned to the item by the 

company awarded the contract. For shipments sent directly from a subcontractor to a DoD 

addressee, the PN of the company awarded the contract shall be shown. The part number shall 

be preceded by the abbreviation “PN” or “P/N”. If the item has no PN assigned to it or if no PN 

is cited, the blank line may be omitted.

d. Item description or nomenclature. The exact name and description of an item as it 

appears in the contract, purchase order or requisition shall be shown. Item description may be 

marked on more than one line if required due to space limitations. Standard abbreviations, 

although not desired, may be used if marking length is excessive.

e. Quantity and UI. A non-definitive UI shall be accompanied by a quantitative 

expression such as “1 RO (100 FT)”.

f. Contract number or purchase order number (procurement instrument identification 

number (PIIN)) including four-digit delivery order or call number, modification for change 

order number (see 5.10.12), and lot number (see 5.10.13) shall be shown. The in-the-clear 

contract number shall include the dashes as shown in the contract, i.e., DAAB07-96-C-1234. 

Additional information may be required by the contract or purchase order.

g. Military preservation method and date of unit preservation (e.g., “M41-4/02” –

method 41, from MIL-STD-2073-1, was provided in April 2002). Use of the letter M in the 

first position indicates the pack is a military preservation method; “41” is the method number; 

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

25

“4/02” indicates the date of preservation. For specialized preservation codes, use the code from 

MIL-STD-2073-1, Table J-Ia. (e.g., “MBC-4/02” – method BC was provided in April 2002). 

Method of preservation code “ZZ” shall be shown as ‘ZZ’. If a military preservation method 

does not apply, the method space shall be left blank. If a preservation date does not apply, the 

pack date shall be shown (e.g. “6/15”).

h. Shelf life. Shelf-life marking, if applicable, shall be applied as specified in 5.10.1. 

The shelf life dates shall be preceded with text or abbreviations to identify the nature of the 

dated event. See examples following 5.10.1.b) and also see 5.1.2.1.c. (1).

i. Serial number(s). When an item is assigned a serial number, that number shall be 

applied and preceded by the abbreviation “SER NO” (see 5.4.1.1.1). Serial numbers assigned 

by the manufacturer solely for the purpose of indicating the quantity produced should not be 

shown.

j. Hazardous materials. Hazardous materials (HAZMAT), ammunition, and explosives

marking (see 5.13 and 5.14).

NOTE: Identification bar code marking requirements, encoding of the UII(s), bar code 

configurations, and bar code formats for unit packs and intermediate containers are 

specified in 5.4.1.1

5.1.2 Identification text marking on exterior containers, palletized unit loads, and

unpacked items (see multiple figures in 5.3. Unless specifically exempted in the contract or 

solicitation or this standard, the following minimum identification text information shall be 

marked on all exterior containers, palletized unit loads, and unpacked (loose) items in the order 

listed. When a palletized unit load of containers or items is formed, the individual containers or 

unpacked items shall be marked with exterior container identification text marks or unpacked 

item identification text marks, subject to exceptions noted in 5.3.2.7. A DoD originated 

shipment packaged in an overpack enclosure (protective outer packaging or palletized unit load) 

for convenience of handling during transportation is exempt from identification marking under 

the following conditions: the overpack enclosure is not an assorted-items pack (see 5.1.2.1), the 

cargo is non-hazardous, the unpacked items or containers within the overpack enclosure are 

marked/tagged with identification information in accordance with this standard, and the overpack 

enclosure is not intended for storage at destination. The minimum text information is:

a. NSN/NATO stock number (see 0.a).

b. CAGE code (see 0.b).

c. Part number (see 0.c).

d. Item description or nomenclature. Unless otherwise specified, shall be blank. 

Required for hazardous items as specified herein (see 0.d). For protected cargo see 5.4.1.6.

e. Quantity and UI (see 0.e).

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

26

f. Contract number or purchase order number (PIIN). The contract number or PIIN, 

including four-digit delivery order or call number, modification for change order number, and 

lot number shall be shown (see 0.f).

(1) When more than one contract is applicable to an assorted-items pack, the 

contract number is not required on the exterior container or palletized unit 

load, but shall be applied to each unit pack and container in the exterior 

container or palletized unit load.

(2) Unless specifically required by a military Service or Agency directive, 

contract identification marking (specifically 5.1.2.f) is not required on 

exterior containers, palletized unit loads, or unpacked items when items are 

repacked for shipment by military installations.

(3) For DLA Troop Support clothing and textile (C&T) items, the following 

additional marking is required: shipment number and container number. 

The container number shall be consecutively numbered from each shipping 

point for the duration of the contract. For multiple container shipments of 

C&T items, the packing list shall be placed inside the last container to be 

loaded for each shipment. The words “PACKING LIST HERE” shall be 

marked on the container.

g. Military preservation method, date of unit preservation, or pack date (see 0.g).

h. Gross weight. The gross weight shall be expressed in pounds rounded up to the 

nearest pound. The gross weight shall be preceded by the abbreviation “WT”.

i. Proper shipping name (PSN) and North American (NA) or United Nations (UN) 

HAZMAT identification number, where assigned (see 5.13.2).

j. Shelf life. Shelf-life marking, if applicable (see 0.h).

k. Serial number(s). When an item is assigned a serial number, that number shall be 

applied and preceded by the abbreviation “SER NO” (see 5.4.1.2.1). Serial numbers assigned 

by the manufacturer solely for the purpose of indicating the quantity produced should not be 

shown.

l. Hazardous materials. Hazardous materials (HAZMAT), ammunition, and explosives 

marking (see 5.13 and 5.14).

NOTE: Identification bar code marking requirements, encoding of the UII(s), bar code 

configurations, and bar code formats for exterior containers, palletized unit loads, and 

unpacked items are specified in 5.4.1.2.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

27

5.1.2.1 Package marking for assorted-items pack.

a. Related assorted-items pack. When an assortment of related items (comprised of 

mixed stock numbers that support an end item but the assortment cannot be identified under one 

stock number) is packed in a shipping container or palletized unit load, the following shall be 

applied in lieu of the standard identification text information: a brief description of the contents 

(e.g., spare parts to NSN XXXX), the contract number or purchase order number (PIIN) (if 

applicable to all items), the date of pack (the date the shipment was packed), the gross weight, 

special marking (as required by 5.10), and additional marks as noted in following subparagraphs. Kit or set components shall be segregated and identified by PN or NSN.

b. Unrelated assorted-items pack. When an assortment of unrelated items (comprised of 

mixed stock numbers that do not support a specific weapon system or end item) is packed into a 

shipping container or palletized unit load, it shall be marked in lieu of the identification text 

marking required by 5.1.2 with the following information, in the order listed: the word 

“MULTIPACK” (line 1), the gross weight (line 2), and additional marks as noted in the 

following sub-paragraphs. Hand printing on multipacks is permitted. For DLA Troop Support 

C&T item palletized unit load multipacks, see 5.3.2.7.b.

Example: MULTIPACK

 WT 100

c. Additional marks for an assorted-items pack (related or unrelated items).

(1) In addition to shelf-life marking on interior packages or unpacked items, the 

words “CONTAINS SHELF-LIFE ITEMS” shall be placed below the 

identification text marking on the exterior container or palletized unit load of 

an assorted-items pack containing shelf-life materiel.

(2) The words “WARRANTED ITEMS INSIDE” shall be placed immediately 

below the identification text marking on the exterior container or palletized 

unit load of an assorted-items pack that contains items covered by a 

warranty.

(3) The words “MULTIPLE DODAACs” shall be applied to the outside of the 

exterior container or palletized unit load of an assorted-items pack of 

individual shipments/containers shipped to a single destination for multiple 

consignees.

(4) For an assorted-items pack of hazardous materials, see 5.13.3 and 5.13.5.6

for the required container and palletized unit load identification marking and 

for additional marking of “OVERPACK” and “AIR ELIGIBLE”, as 

applicable.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

28

(5) Caution marking shall be applied to the outside of the exterior container or 

palletized unit load of an assorted-items pack as required by this standard 

(e.g., FRAGILE, arrows, hazardous warning labels, etc.).

(6) For Foreign Military Sales (FMS) shipments, all containers or palletized unit 

loads containing assorted items (whether related or unrelated) shall be 

marked as a “MULTIPACK” in accordance with 5.1.2.1.b.

5.2 Address marking (shipping labels). Military (DoD) and contractor- or vendororiginated address marking, to include the military shipping label (MSL) and respective bar 

codes, shall be as specified in DTR 4500.9-R, Part II, Chapter 208, and as summarized herein. 

The preferred location for applying address marking to shipping containers, palletized unit loads, 

and unpacked items are shown in the figures in this section. Exact placement of MSLs may vary 

slightly from those shown.

5.2.1 Military (DoD) and contractor- or vendor-originated address marking (see Figures

2A and 2B). Unless specifically exempted in the contract or DTR, DoD and contractor or vendor 

shipping activities shall apply address marking using an MSL with bar codes. This includes 

shipments moving within CONUS or OCONUS, from CONUS to OCONUS, or conversely from 

OCONUS to CONUS.

NOTE: Attach a DD Form 1387 (Military Shipment Label) in lieu of a bar coded MSL for DoD 

contingency operations where manual entry is the only means available to document DTS 

shipments (see Figure 13).

5.2.2 Military shipping label (MSL) (see Figures 2A and 2B). The MSL shall be 

completed in accordance with 5.2.2.5 and attached in accordance with 5.3.2. Each shipment unit 

in a consolidated shipment unit shall be marked with an MSL. For contractor or vendor 

shipments, the MSL information shall be coordinated between the contractor or vendor and the 

contracting office or administrative contracting office, per the FAR 47.305-10, FAR 52.247-52, 

DFARS 247.305-10 and DFARS 247.371.

a. The MSL shall include in-the-clear text entries applicable to the shipment as provided 

for in 5.2.2.5. When the MSL is generated from DTR 4500.9-R, Part II, Appendix M 

transportation control movement document (TCMD) related information, the coded data shall 

be converted to in-the-clear text for printing on the MSL, for example, delete leading zeros from 

numeric values and convert TCMD alphanumeric code values for pieces, weight, and cube to 

numeric digits.

b. The MSL shall include linear (Code 39) bar codes formatted in accordance with this 

standard in reference to ISO/IEC 16388. Three linear (Code 39) bar codes are required 

including the transportation control number (TCN), piece number without leading zeros, and

ultimate consignee/mark for DODAAC.

c. The MSL shall include a 2D (PDF417) bar code in accordance with ANSI MH10.8.1 

and ISO/IEC 15438, formatted in accordance with 5.2.2.6 and Appendix A of this standard, 

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

29

with reference to DTR 4500.9-R, Part II, Chapter 208, ISO/IEC 15434 for bar code syntax, and 

ANSI MH10.8.2 for bar code semantics.

NOTE: Not actual size. Recommended label size is 4 by 6 inches (10.2 by 15. 2 cm).

FIGURE 2A. Generic MSL. FIGURE 2B. Unit move MSL.

(1) The 2D (PDF417) bar code shall contain the in-the-clear text information on 

the MSL as provided for in 5.2.2.6. For contractor or vendor shipments, the 

TCMD information in the 2D (PDF417) bar code, when required, shall be 

coordinated between the contractor or vendor and the contracting office or 

administrative contracting office, per the FAR 47.305-10 and the DFARS 

247.305-10 and 247.371.

(2) The 2D (PDF417) bar code line item supply data for MILSTRIP 

transactions is sourced from DD Form 1348-1A information as noted in 

DLM 4000.25-1, Appendix 1.35, or as carried forward from the 

contract/order. The MSL 2D (PDF417) bar code on each piece of a 

shipment unit shall have the same line item information. For contractor or 

vendor shipments, this information, as available, and the DFARS 247.305-

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

30

10 minimum requirements, shall be coordinated between the contractor or 

vendor and the contracting office or administrative contracting office. For 

non-MILSTRIP transactions, the available information will be limited. 

Ammunition shipments may also include DoD identification code (DODIC) 

or Navy ammunition logistics code (NALC) and lot number information. 

For factors that determine the amount of available data to be recorded in the 

2D (PDF417) bar code, see 5.2.2.6.c.

5.2.2.1 MSL size. The recommended size for the MSL is 4 by 6 inches (10.2 by 

15. 2 cm). The labels and bar codes in the figures have been reduced in size for ease of 

publication.

5.2.2.2 MSL label stock quality. The quality of the MSL label stock shall be such that 

labels are suitable for ink printing without feathering or spreading. The MSL shall withstand 

normal handling and shipping conditions and remain securely in position. For general label 

requirements see 4.2. For HAZMAT label requirements are specified in Title 49 CFR.

5.2.2.3 MSL format. The in-the-clear text and bar code entries shall meet required 

ANSI/ISO standards listed in section 2 and shall comply with 5.2.2.4 through 5.2.2.8, Appendix 

A detailed formats, and DTR 4500.9-R, Part II, Chapter 208 requirements. The in-the-clear text 

and linear (Code 39) bar code human-readable interpretation shall be easily human readable. 

The linear (Code 39) bar code and the 2D (PDF417) bar code shall be easily machine readable. 

Figures 2A and 2B show examples of acceptable MSL formats that may be used as guidelines in 

producing a label. ANSI MH10.8.1 is the referenced standard for developing a DTR compliant 

MSL.

5.2.2.4 Completing the MSL for address marking. The MSL shall be completed as 

follows to include in-the-clear text or descriptive information, linear (Code 39) bar codes with 

human-readable interpretation, and a 2D (PDF417) bar code.

a. Linear (Code 39) and 2D (PDF417) bar code labels may be affixed to the MSL as an 

alternative to direct printing on the MSL, providing the labels do not impact the effectiveness of 

the MSL.

b. Data identifier (DI) codes shall not be used in conjunction with the linear (Code 39) 

bar codes.

c. The MSL unique transport unit identifier shall be the TCN and it shall be encoded 

and printed as the uppermost bar code on the top of the label. Information on TCN construction 

for the various types of shipments is detailed in DTR 4500.9-R, Part II, Cargo Movement, 

Appendix L.

d. Linear (Code 39) or 2D (PDF417) bar codes should not be positioned in the same 

horizontal plane and the label layout should provide as much vertical spacing as available 

between the bar codes to reduce the possibility of scanning interference.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

31

e. The text for all entries, except as noted below shall be no smaller than 10 lines per 1 

inch (25.4 mm) (approximately a 7 point font). The preferred font size is 10 to 14 points.

(1) The “Ship To” address character height shall be no smaller than the “From” 

address character height and should be distinctive in appearance, for 

example, larger, bolder, different color, etc. The “Ship To” address shall be 

located below or to the right of the “From” address.

(2) The transportation priority numeral shall be bold text and shall be 0.75 inch 

(19.1 mm) high (approximately a 72-point font).

5.2.2.5 Data content of the MSL (see Figures 2A and 2B). The data content of the MSL 

and the instructions for completion are summarized below.

a. The MSL shall contain the following information:

(1) TCN. Enter the 17-character (alphanumeric) TCN using a 0.5 inch (12.7 

mm) high linear (Code 39) bar code with human-readable interpretation as 

the uppermost bar code on the top of the label. For consolidated shipments, 

place a lead TCN in this block. The lead TCN shall not duplicate any 

internally packed TCNs.

(2) Transportation Account Code (TAC)/Postage. Enter the TAC or the postage 

data. For other than mail shipments, enter the TAC applicable to shipments 

moving from POE to POD, otherwise leave blank. For mail shipments, use 

one of the following:

(a) For metered mail, attach the stick-on metered postage values to or 

near this block. Do not apply over text or bar codes.

(b) For permit imprint mail, enter the appropriate Service/agency mail 

authorization.

Example: First Class Mail

Postage and Fees Paid

Defense Logistics Agency

Permit No. G-53

(3) From. Enter the Consignor DODAAC/CAGE and in-the-clear address (up 

to 3 lines of 35 characters) of the shipping activity. For mail include the 

ZIP code.

(4) Type Service. In-the-clear text (for example, Frt LTL, Air Expss, Expss 

Mail, TGBL UB, DPM HHG) for the type of transportation service to the 

“Ship To” address. The in-the-clear text may be derived from the TCMD 

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

32

mode/method code for the generic MSL. Should be blank for unit move 

shipments.

(5) Ship to/POE. Enter an in-the-clear ship to address (three characters and five 

lines of up to 35 characters) or, if applicable, enter the three-digit air/water 

port of embarkation (POE) code (from DTR 4500.9-R, Part II, Appendix 

CC or MM) and its ship to address. A POE code is not required for 

shipments to a DLA CCP.

(6) Priority. Enter the applicable transportation priority (TP). TP 1, 2, 3, or 4 

(deferred air freight) should be clearly identified in the priority block of the 

MSL using bold text that is 0.75 inch (19.1 mm) high. Should be blank for 

unit move shipments.

(7) POD. Enter three-digit air/water port of debarkation (POD) designator 

(from DTR 4500.9-R, Part II, Appendix CC or MM), if applicable. In-theclear location name may be included. Blank for classified unit move 

shipments. Blank for mail shipments.

(8) Project Code. Enter project code, if applicable.

(9) Ultimate Consignee/Mark For Consignee. Enter the in-the-clear complete 

address(s) (up to five lines of 35 characters) and the 0.5 inch (12.7 mm) 

high linear (Code 39) bar code for the applicable DODAAC or MAPAC, 

with human-readable interpretation. Blank for classified unit move.

(10) Weight (lbs). Enter actual gross weight (numeric value of this piece). 

Round to next whole digit and do not zero fill.

(11) RDD. Enter the required delivery date (RDD) code specified by the 

requisitioner, if appropriate. Blank for classified unit move.

(12) Cube (ft). Enter the actual cube (numeric value of this piece). Round to 

next whole digit and do not zero fill.

(13) Charges. No known requirement. Leave Blank.

(14) Date Shipped. Enter an in-the-clear date (for example YDDD, 

YYYYDDD, or DD-MMM-YYYY). Blank for unit move. Do not use the 

date shipped code from DTR 4500.9-R, Part II, Appendix RR.

(15) FMS Case Number. Enter FMS case identifier as appropriate. Blank for 

unit move.

(16) Piece Number. Enter the piece number (numeric value assigned to this 

piece) of the cargo documented by the TCN for this shipment unit and a 

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

33

0.5 inch (12.7 mm) high linear (Code 39) bar code. Do not zero fill. Piece 

number may be expressed as “Piece Number of Total Pieces” to save space 

on the label – only the piece number has a linear (Code 39) bar code; the 

word “of” and the total number of pieces are not shown in the linear (Code 

39) bar code.

(17) Total Pieces. Total number (numeric value) of pieces documented by the 

TCN for this shipment unit. Total pieces may be expressed as “Piece 

Number of Total Pieces” to save space on the label – the total pieces value 

is not shown in the piece number linear (Code 39) bar code. Do not zero 

fill.

(18) 2D (PDF417) bar code. Includes MSL in-the-clear text data, selected 

TCMD data, and selected supply/unit information per 5.2.2.6. For unit 

moves only, when the item has been assigned a UII, the UII shall be 

included in the 2D (PDF417) bar code.

b. For unit moves, in addition to the requirements in 5.2.2.6, data for the following 

elements, as applicable, shall be shown on the MSL:

(1) Unit line number (ULN).

(2) Length, width, height (this piece).

(3) Unit identification code (UIC).

(4) Commodity/special handling code (air or water).

(5) Vehicle serial number.

(6) Equipment description.

(7) Bumper number (Army/Navy only).

(8) Model number (Army/Navy only).

(9) Unique item identifier (UII) – only encode the UII in the 2D (PDF417) bar 

code.

(10) Transportation tracking number (TTN) – only encode in the 2D (PDF417) 

bar code when the TTN is available for system entry – typed entry of TTN 

data by a user is not permitted.

c. Additional information. Optional marking includes equipment serial number, NSN, 

and commercial tracking number and/or bar code.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

34

d. Local Processing Data. Shippers may add local internal processing information to 

the label, such as DLA distribution information, as long as it is clearly marked and does not 

interfere with the orientation and placement of MSL data. Additional data may be required by 

the contract or added based on trade agreements.

5.2.2.6 MSL 2D (PDF417) bar code requirements. Each MSL 2D (PDF417) bar code

shall contain the data elements from the applicable table in Appendix A for encoding MSL text, 

TCMD data, and supply line item information.

a. The data elements include MSL information, TCMD data, and the respective TCMD 

trailer data (T_5 through T_9) for the labeled shipment unit, and the line item contents of the 

single shipment unit for a generic MSL (i.e., for other than unit move documented cargo (DTR

4500.9-R Part III) or personal property documented cargo (DTR 4500.9-R Part IV). Table A-I

provides data descriptions, format, and data sources for the ANSI MH10.8.2 DIs used in the 2D 

(PDF417) bar code and for the data element identifiers (DEI) that identify DoD unique data 

elements from DTR 4500.9-R and DLM 4000.25-1. Tables A-II and A-III in this standard

provide the content of the data streams for generic MSLs and unit move MSLs.

b. All shipment unit data and line item data in the MSL 2D (PDF417) bar code 

replicates data from the three sources noted below. If the data is available and a corresponding 

DI or DEI is shown in the applicable Table A-II or A-III, the data shall be entered into the 2D 

(PDF417) bar code. Blank data fields are not to be encoded except as noted in Appendix A, 

A.2.3.h.(1). When multiple sources for a data element are identified, the sources are prioritized 

as follows (TCMD source has priority if it exists):

(1) Source 1: Header TCMD data. Format 07 DEI ‘34’ (Table A-I) shall be 

used to identify the document identifier code of header TCMD data being 

documented in the 2D (PDF417) bar code. The unit move transportation 

tracking number (TTN) is included with this source category.

(2) Source 2: Supply documentation (DD Form 1348-1A) bar code data or 

contract data to include IUID information, as applicable, for each supply 

line item packaged within the shipment unit.

(3) Source 3: Shipment information entered in-the-clear on the MSL.

c. The MSL 2D (PDF417) bar code can only contain limited amounts of data (about 

1,000 characters). The following factors shall be considered when determining the amount of 

available data to record in the 2D (PDF417) bar code.

(1) A consolidated shipment unit containing multiple internal shipment units 

shall be documented by encoding only the header TCMD data and its 

respective trailer TCMD information. The MSL 2D (PDF417) bar code 

shall not be populated with TCMD information from the internal shipment 

units. Each shipment unit in a unitized shipment shall be marked with an 

MSL. The MSL 2D (PDF417) bar code does not contain enough capability 

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

35

to consistently record the internal shipment unit prime TCMD data and the 

respective trailer data.

(2) The 2D (PDF417) bar code for a consolidated shipment unit of multiple 

shipment units, or a mix of line items and multiple shipment units, shall not 

contain any line item information and shall be marked with an in-the-clear 

text message that shall be entered at the bottom of the 2D (PDF417) bar 

code stating “NO LINE ITEM DATA” and it shall be entered into the 

Format 07 DEI ‘35’ (text comment) area of the MSL 2D (PDF417) bar code 

for reprinting purposes. If line item data is still desired for a shipment, it 

should be included on an alternate form of high capacity AIT media.

(3) It may not be possible to document the supply line items of an entire 

multipack or consolidated shipment. If the AIT media cannot store all of 

the line item data required to document the shipment unit, the line item 

information shall be eliminated from the 2D (PDF417) bar code. An in-theclear text message shall be entered at the bottom of the 2D (PDF417) bar 

code stating “NO LINE ITEM DATA” and it shall be entered into the 

Format 07 DEI ‘35’ (text comment) area of the MSL 2D (PDF417) bar code 

for reprinting purposes.

(4) In order to provide space for multiple line item supply data in the 2D 

(PDF417) bar code of the generic MSL, the in-the-clear address data shall 

only be printed in the 2D (PDF417) bar code of a generic MSL for single 

line item shipments or when no line item data is printed in the bar code. 

Most multi-piece shipments derive from a single line item document; 

therefore, the addressing data will usually be available in the 2D (PDF417) 

bar code for reprinting MSLs when a transshipper needs to split a multipiece shipment. The in-the-clear address data should be printed in the 2D 

(PDF417) bar code of the MSL after giving encode priority to the TCMD 

and TTN information in the 2D (PDF417) bar code.

d. Metric units of measure may be used in the 2D (PDF417) bar code for selected 

DIs/DEIs as noted in Table A-I. Metric units of measure shall not be used for in-the-clear text 

entries.

5.2.2.7 MSL bar code printing standards (see Figures 2A and 2B). The three linear 

(Code 39) bar codes and 2D (PDF417) bar code shall be printed in accordance with this standard 

with reference to ANSI MH10.8.1, ISO/IEC 16388, and ISO/IEC 15438 for further explanation. 

ISO/IEC 15416 defines print quality for linear bar codes. ISO/IEC 15415 defines print quality 

for two-dimensional bar codes. Printed bar codes shall conform to “B” quality standards as 

defined in the appropriate standard. The requirements are summarized as follows:

a. Linear (Code 39) bar codes.

(1) The minimum bar height shall be 0.5 inch (12.7 mm).

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

36

(2) The minimum narrow element dimension (X-dimension) shall not be less 

than 0.01 inch (0.25 mm).

(3) The wide to narrow ratio of the elements should be 3:1. The measured ratio 

shall be between 2.4:1 and 3.2:1.

(4) The leading and trailing quiet zones shall be not less than 0.25 inch 

(6.35 mm).

(5) The linear (Code 39) bar codes should be presented on shipment units with 

the bar codes horizontal (picket fence orientation). See 5.3.2.4 for cylinder 

applications.

(6) The label should be designed so that two bar codes are not next to each other 

unless the label is wide enough to reduce the possibility of interference with 

successful bar code scanning.

(7) The quality of the printed bar code shall meet a grade requirement of 2.5 (B) 

at the point of production when measured in accordance with ISO/IEC 

15416 with a measurement aperture of 0.010 inch (10 mils or 0.25 mm) and 

an inspection wavelength of 660 ± 10 nm.

(8) To encode the information, only the Code 39 basic character set (A-Z 0-9 $ 

and the start/stop character[*]) shall be used in accordance with ISO/IEC 

16388.

b. 2D (PDF417) bar code. For technical details, see Appendix A.

5.2.2.8 Human-readable interpretation. The human-readable interpretation for each of 

the linear (Code 39) bar codes should appear above, below, or in line with the linear bar code. 

When in line, a 0.25 inch (6.35 mm) quiet zone shall be provided.

5.2.3 DoD shipments sent through the U.S. Postal Service and commercial parcel

services. Shipments originated by DoD activities and sent through the U.S. Postal Service or a 

commercial parcel service shall comply with the U.S. Postal Service domestic mail and 

commercial carrier requirements in addition to the requirements of this standard.

5.3 Placement of identification text (for ammo/explosives – see 5.14) and address

marking.

5.3.1 Placement of identification text marking on unit packs and intermediate containers

(see Figure 1). Identification text marking on unit packs and intermediate containers shall be so

located as to allow the marking to be easily read and to ensure that the marking will not be 

destroyed when the pack or container is opened for inspection or until its contents have been 

used. The marking surface of a unit pack shall be the outermost wrap, bag, or container of the 

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

37

unit pack. When a barrier bag is used within another unit container, both the bag and the 

outermost container shall be marked. Bundled items should be marked with a tag or by affixing 

a label under one of the bundled ties. The required marking should be placed so that it is not 

obscured by any strapping or closure tape.

5.3.2 Placement of identification text and address marking on exterior shipping

containers, palletized unit loads, and unpacked items (see Figures 3 thru 14).

a. The exact location of the identification text marking may vary slightly. The marking 

shall be applied to the upper left two-thirds of the side of the container or palletized unit load

having the greatest overall, usable marking surface. Specific requirements for the placement of 

the identification text marking on various containers, palletized unit loads, and unpacked items

are discussed in the following paragraphs. The required marking shall not be obscured by 

cleats, strapping, or closure tape. Unless otherwise specified in the contract or solicitation or 

when required by the carrier, such as parcel post, one end and the top and bottom of every 

exterior container or palletized unit load shall be free of identification marking. Marking 

materials used shall meet the requirements specified in section 5. Unless otherwise specified by 

the cognizant activity, the size of the identification text marking lettering shall be as specified in

4.2.8.

b. Address labels should be affixed at a suitable location where there is minimum risk of 

damage and in accordance with the provisions of 5.3.2. For RFID-enabled address labels, see

Passive RFID tag placement. If a label location is not specifically identified in this standard, 

shippers are referred to ANSI MH10.8.1 for additional guidance.

(1) Required address marking shall be placed on the identification-marked side 

of exterior shipping containers. If a container is too small to accommodate 

the address marking on the identification-marked side, the address 

marking/label shall be applied on the opposite side or attached to a shipping 

tag (see 4.2.3) or marking board/panel (see 4.2.7). When the surface of the 

shipping container or material such as pipe, steel, or wood does not lend 

itself to direct application of the MSL, or the MSL obscures other required 

marking on a shipping container, the label shall be attached to a shipping 

tag, marking board or marking panel. The tag shall be large enough to 

accommodate the label without folding. Separate tags shall be used for 

identification and address marking.

(2) Stencil marking alone is not an appropriate alternative for address marking 

of shipments because stenciling cannot accommodate the bar code 

requirements.

5.3.2.1 Boxes and crates. See Figure 3.

a. Boxes and crates 10 cubic feet and over shall have additional identification marking 

placed on the end of the container to the left of the identification-marked side. Placement of 

identification marking on the end of boxes and crates under 10 cubic feet is optional. 

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

38

Regardless of size, identification text marking may be stenciled or printed directly on the 

container or applied by use of a stenciled or preprinted label. If no other adequate marking 

surface is available, cleats may be used as part of the marking surface. If the exterior surface is 

not suitable for direct marking application, a marking board/panel may be used.

NOTE: For identification bar code specific marking locations, 

see Figures 21 and 22.

FIGURE 3. Placement of identification and address marking on boxes and crates.

b. The address label shall be placed on the identification-marked side and right of center 

on a vertical face, allowing a minimum of 2 inches (5 cm) from all edges of the box or crate. 

An additional address label may be placed on the identification-marked end for styles which, 

because of their configuration, allow access by materials handling equipment only to the end of 

the container.

5.3.2.2 Bales and cloth-covered bundles (see Figure 4). The identification text marking

on bales shall be stenciled on the upper two-thirds of the side of the bale having the largest 

marking surface area. Bales with a pre-sewn end and a wire-tied ear on the opposite end shall 

have the NSN, quantity, and UI applied on the pre-sewn end. When both ends have wire-tied 

ears, no identification marking shall be applied on the ends. On cloth-covered bundles, 

identification text marking shall be stenciled on the upper two-thirds of the side of the bundle as 

close to the left side as possible. When direct stenciling is used, there is no need to coat the 

cloth, provided the marking does not become smeared or illegible because of any absorption into 

the cloth. To ensure that the marking is both permanent and readable, the cloth bundle may be 

given a smooth coat of sand-colored lacquer, enamel, or paint over the area to be marked before 

the marking is applied. When stenciling is not appropriate for bales or cloth-covered bundles, 

preprinted labels or tags may be used. Address labels for bales and bundles shall be applied to 

the lower two-thirds of the identification-marked side or to the wire-tied ear with a tag.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

39

NOTE: For identification bar code specific marking locations, see Figure 23.

FIGURE 4. Placement of identification and address marking on

bales and cloth-covered bundles.

5.3.2.3 Paper shipping sacks, bags, and textile/laminated textile bags (see Figure 5). 

Identification text marking shall be printed or stenciled on the side of the sack or bag that does 

not bear the certificate of compliance of the sack manufacturer. Commercially packed 

commodities shall have the required marking stenciled and centered on one face of the sack or 

bag. When the printing area is too small, spacing of the printing may be altered proportionately 

and lines may be consolidated. If the stenciled marking is not legible, it shall be machine printed 

on a tag or label. If a bag is closed by stitching, an identification tag (not an address label) may 

be fastened to the bag by stitching at the time of closure. If the top of a bag has ears, the 

appropriate tag shall be affixed to one of the ears. Address marking shall be placed on a label or 

tag. When a label is used, it shall be applied below the identification marking. If the bag is 

closed by stitching, a tag may be fastened to the bag by stitching when closure is made. If the 

top of the bag has ears, the tag shall be affixed to one of the ears.

NOTE: For identification bar code specific 

marking locations, see Figure 23.

FIGURE 5. Placement of identification and address marking on sacks and bags.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R 

40

5.3.2.4 Barrels, drums, and other cylindrical containers (including empty containers)

(see Figure 6). Identification text marking shall be stenciled or preprinted on the upper one-third 

of filled barrels, pails, kegs, drums, and reusable metal containers. In addition to the required 

marking on 50- and 55-gallon drums or barrels with non-removable heads, identification data 

(less weight) and shelf-life marking shall also be shown on the head. Forest-green containers 

shall be marked with yellow or white lettering. Although the preferred methods of application 

are stenciling and preprinting, labels or tags may be used when a container is too small for either 

method. However, unless otherwise approved by the cognizant activity, labels or tags shall not 

be used for identification text marking on metal containers, unless the containers are too small to 

accommodate the stenciled or preprinted marking. Also, if labels are used for marking, only 

pressure-sensitive labels shall be used on cylindrical containers and metal drums. Marking shall 

be avoided in the space 6 inches (15.2 cm) above or below the centerline of the body sidewall for 

barrels not swaged with rolling hoops. On empty barrels, drums, and cylindrical containers, 

identification marking shall be applied on the top and on the upper one-third of the side by 

attaching labels or tags. The preferred location for the address label is on the middle one-third of 

the identification marked side of the container, except for barrels not swaged with rolling hoops. 

However, if space is not available in this location, the address label shall be placed in a 

conspicuous location in close proximity to the identification marking. A flat surface of the 

container is preferred to accommodate scanning of the 2D (PDF417) and linear (Code 39) bar 

codes. If space is not available on the surface of the container for the address label, the label 

shall be placed on a shipping tag. 

NOTE: For identification bar code specific marking 

locations, see Figure 24. 

FIGURE 6. Placement of identification and address marking on barrels, 

drums, and other cylindrical containers. 

5.3.2.5 Miscellaneous articles and unpacked items such as spools, reels, rods, coils of 

wire and cable, and paper- and cloth-wrapped rolls (see Figure 7). Identification marking shall 

be applied on two tags securely attached to items such as rods and bars. One of the tags shall be 

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

41

bound to the item with burlap or other suitable covering, with each end of the cover securely 

fastened. The other tag shall be securely attached to the item with a wire or twine (see 4.2.3). 

On reels or spools of cable and wire, identification text marking shall be stenciled on the side of 

the reel or spool. When this area does not permit stenciling, marking may be applied by using a 

label. On coils of wire, identification marking shall be applied on two tags securely attached to 

the coil. On paper- and cloth-wrapped rolls, identification text marking shall be applied by 

stenciling, printing, or labeling. Prior to stenciling cloth-wrapped rolls, the marking area shall be 

given a smooth coating of sand-colored lacquer, enamel, or paint. One end of wrapped rolls 

shall contain NSN, quantity, and UI marking. Address marking shall be applied to these types of 

miscellaneous articles and unpacked items by using labels on flat areas or on tags as shown.

NOTE: For identification bar code specific marking locations, see Figures 23 and 25.

FIGURE 7. Placement of identification and address marking on 

miscellaneous articles and unpacked items.

5.3.2.6 Unpacked major equipment (except unpacked vehicles) (see Figure 8). 

Identification text marking shall be either stenciled on a marking board/panel applied to the most 

suitable location on the item, or they shall be printed on a label attached directly on the 

equipment’s surface. Address marking shall be applied by using labels applied to the marking 

board or attached to the equipment’s surface. Labels (identification or address) shall be attached 

to the equipment’s surface with ASTM D5486/D5486M, type I, class 2 tape. The tape shall be 

placed over the label and shall extend 0.05 inch (1.27 mm) or more from its edges. For 

unpacked vehicle marking requirements, see 5.3.2.9.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

42

FIGURE 8. Placement of identification and address marking on unpacked major equipment.

5.3.2.7 Palletized unit load (see Figure 9). When a palletized unit load of containers or 

items is formed, the individual containers/items comprising the unitized load shall be marked 

with exterior container identification marks or unpacked item marks. Unless otherwise specified, 

unit loads of box-packed items shall have one or more boxes turned to present a blank surface for 

marking. The palletized unit load shall have the identification and address marking applied as 

specified herein and as shown in Figure 9. For palletized unit loads 10 cubic feet and over, 

additional identification marking shall be placed on the end of the load adjacent to the 

identification-marked side. When a fiberboard container such as a triple-wall fiberboard box is 

used for unitizing a load in lieu of palletization, all required marking, including the address label, 

may be placed directly on the flat fiberboard surface. Unitized tires shall be stacked on pallets, 

sidewall to sidewall, to prevent the marking on individual tires from being seen around the 

circumference of the load. The gross weight for palletized/containerized unit loads shall include 

the weight of the pallet or container base. Because palletized loads are often stacked two or three 

high when shipped or stored, the marking shall be large enough to be read from a distance. The 

size of the lettering (see 4.2.8) shall be proportionate to the overall size of the unitized load but 

shall be not less than 0.75 inch (19.1 mm) in height. A loaded 463L System pallet is not 

considered to be a palletized unit load for marking of identification information in accordance 

with this standard. A loaded 463L System pallet is documented for movement as specified in 

Defense Transportation Regulation, DTR 4500.9-R, Part II, Chapter 203.

a. Identification marking (see 5.1.2) shall be placed on a marking board or panel, 

securely attached to two adjacent sides of the palletized load, by using a label or by direct 

stenciling. Palletized loads with smooth, flat surfaces may have identification text marking 

stenciled directly on two surfaces, with the marking extending from one container to another.

b. Except for DLA Troop Support C&T items, a palletized load of containers of items 

having different NSNs shall be marked as a “MULTIPACK” (see 5.1.2.1.b). Palletized loads of 

DLA Troop Support C&T items having different NSNs shall be marked as specified in the 

contract or order.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

43

NOTE: For identification bar code specific marking locations, see Figure 25.

FIGURE 9. Placement of identification and address marking on palletized unit loads.

c. When a palletized load is covered with stretch-wrap film, pressure-sensitive labels 

containing the identification and address marking may be placed on the outermost layer of 

wrap, on either side of the load in addition to other marking requirements. Variations are 

authorized based on local operations and capabilities (for example, a marking board/panel 

positioned on the pallet before the last layer of wrap is applied).

d. The address label(s) attached directly to a container on the pallet or to a marking 

board or panel shall be positioned as follows:

(1) The address label shall be placed right of center on a vertical face, allowing 

a minimum of 2 inches (5 cm) from all edges of the unit load.

(2) The bottom edge of the address label containing the unit load information 

should be within the range of 32 to 48 inches (81 to 122 cm) from the 

bottom of the pallet. If the loaded pallet is less than 40 inches (102 cm) in 

height, the label should be placed as high as possible on the pallet, but not 

closer than 2 inches (5 cm) to the natural top of the unit load.

e. A DoD shipment packaged in an overpack enclosure (palletized unit load) for 

convenience of handling during transportation is exempt from identification marking under the 

following conditions: the overpack enclosure is not an assorted-items pack (see 5.1.2.1), the 

cargo is non-hazardous, the unpacked items or containers within the overpack enclosure are 

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

44

marked/tagged with identification information in accordance with this standard, and the overpack 

enclosure is not intended for storage at destination.

5.3.2.8 Wood products. Identification marking shall consist of the NSN and contract 

data only. If the NSN is not available, the item description as cited in the contract (e.g., door, 

wood, exterior, etc.) shall be used. Identification text marking shall be applied by stenciling the 

most suitable area. Address marking shall be applied by labeling or tagging. When wood 

products are shipped on a single conveyance to more than one consignee, address marking shall 

be provided on each shipment unit.

5.3.2.8.1 Bundled wood products (see Figure 10). When identification text marking is 

applied by stenciling, it shall be placed directly on the side of the bundle. If the area does not 

permit stenciling, two or more identification tags may be attached to the bundle. Identification 

text marking may also be stenciled directly on a marking board/panel or may be applied by using 

a stenciled label. When a marking board/panel is used, it shall be securely fastened to the 

bundle. Fiberboard shall not be used as a marking board/panel for bundled wood products. 

However, wood or wood-based panels may be used as marking boards/panels for bundled wood 

pallets. In addition to the NSN and contract number, OCONUS shipments of bundled wood 

products require address marking. For wrapped bundles of wood products, the address label may 

be applied directly below the identification marking. For unwrapped bundles, the address label 

may be attached to a shipping tag or marking board secured to the bundled unit (stenciling is 

only permitted for text characters). Prior to shipment, a transparent, waterproof laminate shall be 

placed over the address label, if the label is not weather resistant (see 4.2.1 and 4.2.2).

FIGURE 10. Placement of identification and address marking on bundled

wood products.

5.3.2.8.2 Unstrapped (loose) wood products (piles, poles, etc.) (see Figure 11). 

Identification text marking shall be applied by either stenciling or tagging. If tags are used, they 

shall be securely attached to the unstrapped (loose) pieces. Metal or plastic tags may be used 

when authorized by the procuring activity. At least 10 percent of the total pieces in a single 

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

45

shipment shall be marked. Address marking shall be affixed on the side of the load by labeling

on a marking board or tag (stenciling is only permitted for text characters). For materiel such as 

poles and ties that is preservative-treated with oil solutions, stenciling shall be accomplished with 

aluminum-leaf paint.

FIGURE 11. Placement of identification and address marking

on unstrapped (loose) wood products.

5.3.2.8.3 Miscellaneous wood products in containers (doors, windows, and moldings)

(see Figure 12). Identification text marking shall be applied by stenciling or labeling. Address 

marking shall be applied to the identification-marked side of the container.

FIGURE 12. Placement of identification and address marking on 

miscellaneous wood products in containers.

5.3.2.9 Unpacked vehicles (see Figure 13). Identification marking is not required on 

unpacked vehicles that are shipped within CONUS. Address marking is not required on 

driveaway, truckaway, railaway, or towaway shipments within CONUS. The address marking of 

vehicles for unit move shipments shall be in accordance with the applicable regulations of the 

military department involved as required by DTR 4500.9-R. For other than unit moves, the 

address marking for CONUS shipments and the identification and address labels for OCONUS 

vehicle shipments shall be applied to a marking board/panel or applied by attaching a preprinted 

label on the vehicle’s surface with ASTM D5486/D5486M, type I, class 2 tape. When the 

address label is attached directly to the surface of the vehicle, the label shall be placed either on 

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

46

the rear of the vehicle or on the right side (passenger side) near the rear of the vehicle. When 

marking boards/panels are used, they shall be secured on the front of the vehicle. When 

possible, the marking shall be positioned on the vehicle at a height of not more than 6 feet or less 

than 4 feet. When the use of these locations is not practicable, the best alternate location shall be 

selected.

NOTE: The figure shows a DD Form 1387 (Military Shipment Label) used in lieu of a 

bar coded MSL for DoD contingency operations where manual entry is the only means 

available to document DTS shipments.

FIGURE 13. Placement of identification and address marking on a 

marking board for an unpacked vehicle.

5.3.2.10 Commercial-owned or Government-owned (or leased) shipping containers

(SEAVAN) (see Figure 14). Exterior container identification marking shall not be placed on the 

outside of a SEAVAN. A completed MSL shall be attached to the seal on the SEAVAN or shall 

be attached at the rear of each SEAVAN. As per DTR direction, all individual shipment units 

documented with a TCN, including multiple shipment units inside a consolidation container, 

shall be marked with an MSL to facilitate DTS movement, in-transit visibility, and incheck/receipt processing. Unit packs, containers, palletized unit loads, and unpacked items do 

not require individual address marking or address bar code marks if they are all unitized by the 

shipper of origin into one single shipment unit and loaded into a SEAVAN for delivery as a 

complete container load to the ultimate consignee of the single shipment unit – however, the 

Transportation Control Movement Document (TCMD) TCN for the single shipment unit inside 

the van will be different from the TCN for the SEAVAN. CCP activities which receive 

shipments for consolidation are not required to obliterate address labels applied by the shipper of 

origin or to re-label the consolidated shipment units.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

47

FIGURE 14. Placement of address marking (MSL on a SEAVAN).

5.3.2.11 Full rail carload and full truckload shipments. Full rail carload and full 

truckload shipments moving as a single shipment unit from a single consignor to a single 

consignee require at least one completed MSL be attached to the container, palletized unit load, 

or unpacked item located closest to the door. Additional MSLs may be placed on other 

containers, palletized unit loads, or unpacked items in the shipment.

5.3.2.12 Less than rail carload and less than truckload (LTL) shipments. An MSL is 

required on shipping containers, palletized unit loads, and unpacked items for less than rail 

carload and LTL lots. Exterior container marking is not required on the train car or truck.

5.3.2.13 Tires (loose). Identification or address marking on tires shall be placed on tags 

affixed to the tires with twine or by labels affixed to the outside sidewall or on the tire tread. 

Labels with rubber based adhesives such as those conforming to MIL-PRF-61002, Type 

Optional, Grade A, Style 3-Rubber, Composition (b) (laminated) shall be used. In addition to the 

required identification marking, tires shall be marked with the cure date and the expiration or 

inspect/test date (choose one). Tires requiring Department of Transportation (DOT) marking

molded into the sidewall do not require the cure date to be marked since the last three digits of 

the DOT marking indicate the week and year of the manufacture of the tire (cure date). Only the 

expiration or inspect/test date (choose one) is required. Bar code marking required for exterior 

containers (see 5.4.1.2) shall be applied to all tires or a label. An MSL shall be affixed to a 

shipping tag or it shall be affixed directly to the tire. Additional guidance on the marking of tires 

is contained in MIL-DTL-4.

5.3.2.14 Tubular products (loose). Identification marking shall be applied by labels or 

weather-resistant tags. Plastic or metal tags may be used when authorized by the procuring 

activity. The address label shall be affixed to a flat surface on the side of the load or to a tag.

5.3.2.15 Tubular products (bundles and lifts). Two weather-resistant tags containing the

identification marking shall be applied to 10 percent of the load. Plastic or metal tags may be 

used when authorized by the procuring activity. Identification text marking may also be 

stenciled or labeled on a marking board/panel, which shall be attached to the load by

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

48

ASTM D5486/D5486M, type I, class 2 tape or metal bands as specified in ASTM D3953 (used 

with ASTM D4675). The address label shall be affixed to a flat surface on the side of the load or 

on the marking board/panel.

5.4 Identification bar code marking (for ammo/explosives – see 5.14) (see Figure 1 and 

25). For single line item packaging and marking (for example one NSN with a quantity of one or 

more), identification bar codes (2D (PDF417) and/or linear (Code 39) with human-readable 

interpretation), as applicable, are required for DoD and contractor- or vendor-originated 

shipments, unless specifically exempted in the contract. See 5.4.1.3 for assorted-item packaging 

requirements.

NOTE: A loaded RORO trailer/vehicle, loaded SEAVAN, loaded 463L pallet, or other unitized 

load documented as a shipment unit consolidation in accordance with DTR 4500.9-R Part II 

Appendix M or unit move cargo documented in accordance with DTR 4500.9-R Part III are 

exempt from the identification marking requirements in this standard.

a. For identification marking of other than UII information, a 2D (PDF417) bar code(s)

and/or linear (Code 39) bar codes shall be used on unpacked items, unit packs, intermediate and 

exterior containers, and palletized unit loads. Use of the 2D (PDF417) bar code is preferred.

b. For identification marking of UII information, the 2D (PDF417) bar code(s) shall be 

used for listing UIIs (DI ‘25S’) and the data normally included in the linear (Code 39) 

identification bar codes (see 5.4.1.1.2 and 5.4.1.2.2). For UII identified items, ISO/IEC 15434 

Format 06 envelopes (see Appendix A) shall be used in the 2D (PDF417) bar code to associate 

item-specific data (e.g. UII, a serial number, and other data such as manufacturer, lot number, 

etc.) for uniquely identified items.

c. Identification text marking and 2D (PDF417) identification bar code marking 

requirements for ammunition containers are specified in 5.14.

d. Information and illustrations on the content of identification bar code marking on 

containers, palletized unit loads, and unpacked items of non-ammunition commodities are in 

5.4.1.1 thru 5.4.5.13.

5.4.1 Bar code data content specifications (non-ammunition).

NOTE: Bar code requirements for container UII/serial number list requirements are in 5.4.1.2.1. 

Bar code marking requirements for the MSL are in 5.2.2.6 and 5.2.2.7. Bar code marking 

requirements for the DD Form 1348-1A (Issue Release/Receipt Document) are in 5.12. Bar code 

requirements for customer direct shipments are in 5.5.

5.4.1.1 Identification bar code content for unit packs and intermediate containers (see 

Figures 1, 18 and 19). The following shall be identified with machine-readable bar codes on unit 

packs and intermediate containers. For information on the placement of bar code marking on 

unit packs and intermediate containers, see 5.4.4.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

49

a. The NSN/NATO stock number. The NSN/NATO stock number encoded in a bar 

code shall consist of the basic 13 data characters. Unless otherwise specified in the contract or 

purchase order, prefixes and suffixes to the stock number, as well as spaces and dashes, shall 

not be encoded.

b. The UII(s) and assigned serial number(s). UII and serial number bar code marking 

and content requirements are subject to complex conditional situations based on the choice of

bar code used, whether or not UIIs are involved, the number of UIIs or serial numbers, and if 

the container is a consolidation of assorted items. Each situation is addressed in following 

paragraphs.

5.4.1.1.1 Identification 2D (PDF417) and linear (Code 39) bar code encoded serial 

numbers on unit packs and intermediate containers (see Figures 1, 17 and 18). When an item is 

assigned a serial number, that number shall be encoded and applied using machine-readable bar

codes (2D (PDF417) and/or linear (Code 39)). The in-the-clear serial number shall be preceded 

by the abbreviation "SER NO". The letters “SER NO” are not encoded in the bar code. A 2D 

(PDF417) bar code, if used in lieu of the linear (Code 39) bar codes for package marking and 

serial number lists, shall include the serial number(s) and other identification information (see 

5.4.1.1) and be preceded by a data area title for the encoded information, for example “ID 

DATA”. When more than five serial-numbered items are in an intermediate container, the 

requirements for encoded serial numbers on an exterior shipping container apply, as specified in

5.4.1.2.1.

5.4.1.1.2 Identification 2D (PDF417) bar code encoded unique item identifiers (UII) on 

unit packs and intermediate containers (see Figures 1, 17, and 18). When an item is assigned a 

UII, the UII shall be developed as specified in the DoD Guide to Uniquely Identifying Items. 

The UII(s) and the applicable identification information (see 5.4.1.1), to include a serial number 

(if assigned), shall be encoded in a 2D (PDF417) bar code and applied subject to the following 

provisions.

a. The bar code(s) shall be preceded by a data area title for the encoded information, for 

example “ID DATA INCLUDES UII(s)”.

b. Human-readable interpretation text for the UII(s) in a 2D (PDF417) bar code is 

optional.

c. See Appendix A for 2D (PDF417) bar code requirements and data semantics technical 

information. ANSI MH10.8.2 data identifier ‘25S’ shall be used to identify each item’s UII. 

The 2D (PDF417) bar code(s) shall be placed in close proximity to the identification marking.

d. When more than five UII marked items are in an intermediate container, the 

requirements for encoded UIIs on an exterior shipping container apply, as specified in 5.4.1.2.2.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

50

FIGURE 15. Examples of typical linear (Code 39) bar code fields.

5.4.1.2 Identification bar code content for exterior containers, palletized unit loads, and 

unpacked items (see Figures 1, 15, 22, and 25). Exterior shipping containers, palletized unit 

loads, and unpacked items shall be marked using machine-readable bar codes with the following 

information:

a. The NSN/NATO stock number. The NSN shall be encoded as specified in the 

5.4.1.1.

b. The contract or order number (including the call number).

c. The CAGE code of the company awarded the contract.

d. The CLIN (when used) shall be encoded with six characters, including zero fillers 

placed to the left of the number, for example, 0001AB. For multiple CLIN(s), only the first 

number shall be encoded.

e. The contractor shipment number, when assigned, shall be encoded using seven 

characters and eight if it includes a suffix, (see DFARS Appendix F, Part 3). The first three 

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

51

positions shall always be alpha, the last three always numeric, and the fourth either alpha or 

numeric, for example, BETH001 or BET0001.

f. The UII(s) and assigned serial number(s). UII and serial number bar code marking 

and content requirements are subject to complex conditional situations based on the choice of 

bar code used, whether or not UIIs are involved, the number of UIIs or serial numbers, and if 

the container is a consolidation of assorted items. Each situation is addressed in following 

paragraphs.

NOTE: For linear (Code 39) bar code configurations, see 5.4.2.4 thru 5.4.2.6. For information 

on the placement of bar code marking see 5.4.5.

5.4.1.2.1 Identification 2D (PDF417) and linear (Code 39) bar code encoded serial 

numbers on unpacked items, exterior shipping containers, and palletized unit loads. When an 

item is assigned a serial number, that number shall be encoded and applied using machinereadable bar codes (2D (PDF417) and/or linear (Code 39)) subject to the exemptions in 5.4.5, 

5.4.5.10, 5.4.1.3, and the following provisions.

a. Serial numbers shall be shown as part of the identification marking except when the 

item is packed and marked in accordance with 5.10.14.1. Linear (Code 39) bar codes, if used, 

shall be arranged in a stacked, in-line, or combination configuration.

b. The in-the-clear serial number shall be preceded by the abbreviation "SER NO". The 

letters “SER NO” are not encoded in the bar code.

c. If more than five serial numbers are identified for an exterior container or palletized 

unit load, a serial number list shall be provided in lieu of marking the packaging.

(1) For each exterior container, the list shall contain a human-readable NSN and 

the serial number(s) accompanied by a bar code (2D (PDF417) and/or linear 

(Code 39)) identifying each serialized item in the container. Copies of the 

list(s) shall be placed inside and outside a container. The words “SERIAL 

NUMBER LIST INSIDE” shall be marked on the identification-marked side 

of the container. The list(s), of included serial numbers, attached to the 

outside of each container shall be enclosed in a water resistant envelope for 

possible use during receipt, inventory, and pick processes (to preclude 

opening the packed item). For a multi-piece shipment unit of exterior 

containers (i.e. multiple containers have same TCN), the list(s) of serial 

numbers for each piece shall also be included in the packing list envelope 

with the shipment packing list as applicable (see 5.11).

(2) For a palletized unit load, the list shall contain a human-readable NSN and 

serial number accompanied by a bar code (2D (PDF417) and/or linear (Code 

39)) identifying each serialized item in the palletized unit load. The list(s) 

shall be in a water resistant envelope near the identification mark on the 

palletized unit load and the envelope should be labeled “SERIAL NUMBER 

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

52

LIST INSIDE”. For a multi-piece shipment unit of palletized unit loads (i.e. 

multiple palletized unit loads have same TCN), the list(s) of serial numbers 

shall also be included in the packing list envelope with the shipment 

packing list as applicable (see 5.11).

d. A single 2D (PDF417) bar code or multiple 2D (Macro PDF417) bar codes (see 

Appendix A) may be used in lieu of linear (Code 39) bar codes for package marking and serial 

number lists; however, the human-readable serial numbers shall be listed. The 2D (PDF417 or 

Macro PDF417) bar codes shall include the serial number(s) and other identification 

information (see 5.4.1.2) and be preceded by a data area title for the encoded information, for 

example “ID DATA”.

5.4.1.2.2 Identification 2D (PDF417) bar code encoded unique item identifiers (UII) on 

unpacked items, exterior shipping containers, and palletized unit loads. When an item is 

assigned a UII, the UII shall be constructed as specified in the DoD Guide to Uniquely 

Identifying Items. The UII(s) and the applicable identification information (see 5.4.1.2) shall be 

encoded in a single 2D (PDF417) bar code or multiple 2D (Macro PDF417) bar codes subject to 

the exemptions in 5.4.5, 5.4.5.10, and the following provisions.

a. The bar code(s) shall be preceded by a data area title for the encoded information, for 

example “ID DATA INCLUDES UII(s)”.

b. Human-readable interpretation text for the UII(s) in a 2D (PDF417 or Macro PDF417) 

bar code is optional for packaging marks and accompanying packing list documents.

c. All of the UIIs shall be encoded and applied in a single 2D (PDF417) bar code or 

multiple 2D (Macro PDF417) bar codes. Also, if more than five UIIs are contained within an 

exterior container or palletized unit load, the encoded data in the bar codes(s) on the 

items/containers/loads shall be on applicable serial number lists and/or UII list(s) similar to the 

serial number lists described in 5.4.1.2.1.c.(1) and (2).

5.4.1.3 Assorted-items pack (see 5.1.2.1). The exterior shipping containers and

palletized unit load of an assorted-items pack shall have identification bar code marks applied as 

follows:

a. NSN/NATO stock number. None. However, unit packs and intermediate containers 

that comprise the assorted-items pack shall have identification bar code marking applied as 

described in 5.4.4.

b. Contract number. The contract number shall be marked with a bar code if the 

number applies to all items of the assorted-items pack. If the assorted-items pack content is 

sourced from multiple contracts, then the contract number shall not be marked.

c. CAGE and CLIN – None.

d. Contractor shipment number – None.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

53

e. UII(s) and serial number(s) – None.

5.4.1.4 Sets, kits, and outfits (SKO). Identification bar code marking shall be applied to 

all SKOs, whether the SKOs were obtained through procurement or were assembled at a DoD 

activity. When a multiple container SKO is comprised of other SKOs, all containers shall be 

marked with identification bar codes that identify only the final (end item/product) SKO. When 

the SKO is obtained through procurement, the end-item/product NSN, CAGE, contract number, 

CLIN (when used), contractor shipment number, and UII/serial number of the complete SKO 

shall be encoded for exterior shipping containers and palletized unit loads. When an SKO is 

assembled at a DoD activity, only the NSN and UII/serial number shall be encoded. All 

containers of a multiple container shipment shall be marked as specified in 5.10.14.

5.4.1.5 Materiel destined for resale. Unit packs and intermediate containers of materiel 

destined for resale that normally have a Universal Product Code (UPC) bar code need not be 

remarked with linear (Code 39) and 2D (PDF417) bar codes.

5.4.1.6 Protected cargo (controlled, sensitive, classified, and pilferable items). Unless 

otherwise specified in the contract or solicitation, purchase order, or shipping document, the item 

description (nomenclature) shall be omitted from all shipping containers of protected cargo. 

Identification bar code marking is required. If the NSN is included as part of the identification 

marking, the linear (Code 39) bar code human-readable interpretation shall be shown. However, 

if the NSN is omitted, the human-readable interpretation shall also be omitted. For shipments of 

DLA Troop Support C&T items, the human-readable interpretation shall remain. For shipments 

of DLA Troop Support medical items, the item description (nomenclature) and the NSN, 

including the human-readable interpretation, shall be omitted; in lieu of the marking, the term 

“MEDICAL SUPPLIES” shall be used. The only exception is for medical material classified as 

both protected cargo and hazardous material; for these items, hazardous marking requirements 

shall take precedence.

5.4.2 Identification bar code labels / printing. Identification linear (Code 39) bar code 

marking shall be printed on a label or, upon authorization by the cognizant activity, by direct 

printing on the packaging material. Linear (Code 39) identification bar codes can be applied 

directly with the identification text marking or printed onto a separate label. Stenciling of linear 

bar codes is not permitted. The 2D (PDF417) bar code(s) shall be printed onto label stock. Bar 

code labels may be accepted for use without a quality verification if they are accompanied by a 

certificate of conformance (COC), from the printing activity, for review by the applying/marking 

activity. However, the COC does not supersede the need to scan the marking after any process 

that may affect the readability of the bar codes, such as the application of tape.

5.4.2.1 Label stock requirements. For label stock general requirements, see 4.2.2.

a. Labels shall be constructed of a computer-imprintable media with a 1-mil acrylic 

permanent adhesive or equivalent.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

54

b. When specified in the contract or purchase order, identification bar code labels 

generated on direct-thermal printers may be used on unit packs, intermediate and exterior 

containers, palletized unit loads, and unpacked items. The direct-thermal labels shall be 

durable, buff-colored stock, or its equivalent.

5.4.2.2 Linear (Code 39) bar code printing specifications. Linear (Code 39) bar codes 

shall be prepared in accordance with ISO/IEC 16388. Print quality, element width, and wide to 

narrow ratios shall comply with ISO/IEC 15416 and ANSI MH10.8.1. The standard linear 

(Code 39) bar code density range should be from 3.0 to 9.4 characters per inch (CPI). When a 

direct-marking process is used to bar code exterior shipping containers or palletized unit loads, a 

bar code character density range of 1.7 to 3.0 CPI may be used. Higher bar code densities in the 

range of 9.4 to 15.5 CPI may be used, when specified, for unique applications.

5.4.2.3 Two-dimensional (2D) (PDF417) bar code printing specifications. 2D (PDF417) 

bar codes shall be prepared in accordance with ANSI MH10.8.2, ISO/IEC 15434, and ISO/IEC 

15438 with reference to ANSI MH10.8.6 for industry considerations. Print quality shall comply 

with ISO/IEC 15415 and ANSI MH10.8.1. The bar code shall have a quiet zone of .04 inch 

(1.0 mm) above, below, to the left, and to the right. The quiet zone is included within the 

calculation of the size of the bar code (see Appendix A for additional specification 

requirements).

5.4.2.4 Identification linear (Code 39)) marking basic configurations (see Figure 16A). 

Linear (Code 39) bar codes may be arranged either vertically (ladder bars) or horizontally (picket 

fence bars) in a stacked or in-line configuration. Unless otherwise specified in the contract or 

order, all linear (Code 39) bar codes shall be in a horizontal configuration. When two or three 

linear (Code 39) bar codes are encoded, a stacked configuration is preferred. When three or 

more bar codes are configured in-line, the spacing between bar codes shall be increased so that 

false reads will not occur when using a non-contact reader.

5.4.2.5 Identification linear (Code 39) bar code complex configurations (see Figure 

16B). There may be cases requiring the use of configurations more complex than the single 

stack or single in-line configuration. A combination configuration contains two or more columns 

of stacked bar codes and two or more rows of in-line bar codes. A staggered configuration is 

similar to a combination configuration, but each stack of bar codes is staggered, or offset, from 

the adjacent stack of bar codes. The staggered configuration satisfies the requirement for a 

distance of at least 2.25 inches (57.15 mm) between the bar codes when there are three or more 

in-line bar codes.

5.4.2.6 Identification linear (Code 39) bar code configuration information. The 

following configuration information is listed in the order of preference.

a. Two linear (Code 39) bar codes:

(1) Stacked.

(2) In-line.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

55

b. Three or four linear (Code 39) bar codes:

(1) Single stack.

(2) Combination (e.g., two stacks of in-line linear (Code 39) bar codes).

(3) Staggered (e.g., two staggered stacks of two).

c. Five to ten linear (Code 39) bar codes:

(1) Single stack.

(2) Combination (e.g., two stacks of in-line linear (Code 39) bar codes).

(3) Staggered (e.g., two to four stacks of staggered linear (Code 39) bar codes).

d. Eleven or more linear (Code 39) bar codes:

(1) Single stack (if space permits).

(2) Combination (if three or more stacks are required, the spacing between 

stacks is increased from 0.5 to 2.25 inches (12.7 to 57.15 mm)).

(3) Staggered (several possible arrangements).

FIGURE 16A. Linear (Code 39) bar 

code configurations.

FIGURE 16B. Complex linear (Code 39) 

bar code configurations.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

56

5.4.3 General application requirements for identification bar codes and labels. The bar 

codes shall be located in close proximity to the identification text marking (see 5.3). 

Identification bar code marking shall not be obscured by application of strapping or tape.

5.4.3.1 Applying identification bar codes on containers/surfaces (other than wood). On 

containers or marking surfaces other than wood, labels are required for identification 2D 

(PDF417) bar codes, and identification linear (Code 39) bar code marking shall be applied by 

labeling or by direct printing. When an untinted/transparent laminate or equivalent or a 

stretch/shrink wrap is placed over the label, the bar code(s) shall meet the print quality 

requirements of ISO/IEC 15438 for 2D (PDF417) and ISO/IEC 16388 for linear (Code 39) bar 

codes.

5.4.3.2 Applying identification bar code labels on wood containers/surfaces. On wood 

containers or marking surfaces, identification bar codes shall be applied only by labels. The 

labeling area of the container shall be given a smooth coat of spar varnish or a transparent 

acrylic, polyurethane, or epoxy coating. A clear/transparent laminate or equivalent shall be 

placed over the bar code label. In addition to a laminate or adhesive, it may also be necessary to 

affix the label by stapling. Any commercial-type staple may be used as long as it is placed 

outside of the bar code and 0.25 inch (6.35 mm) from the surrounding quiet zone. The label 

could be affixed to a piece of card stock that is slightly larger than the label. The card stock 

would then be stapled to the container with heavy-duty staples. For those applications requiring 

special label requirements, see 4.2.2.

5.4.3.3 Identification 2D (PDF417) and linear (Code 39) bar code marking on 

transparent containers. A bar code marking placed inside a transparent container shall be 

machine readable from the outside of the container. Similarly, an identification bar code 

marking on containers that are shrink/stretch wrapped into a load shall be machine readable from 

the outside of the load in at least one location and shall meet the readability requirements of 

ISO/IEC 15438 for 2D (PDF417) and ISO/IEC 16388 for linear (Code 39) bar codes.

5.4.4 Placement of identification 2D (PDF417) and linear (Code 39) bar code marking

on unit packs and intermediate containers (see Figures 17 and 18 respectively). For linear (Code 

39) identification bar codes, the NSN/NATO stock number shall be bar coded and applied above 

the in-the-clear text identification mark. When space does not permit placement of all the 

required identification bar code marking on one surface of the container, the identification bar 

code labels or marking can be placed on the opposite side of the container, the adjacent end, or 

on a tag attached to the container. When the unit pack and exterior shipping container are one 

and the same, only exterior container bar code marking shall be applied.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

57

NOTE: “SHELF LIFE” is a placeholder for dates (see 5.10.1).

FIGURE 17. Bar code marking on unit packs.

NOTE: “SHELF LIFE” is a placeholder for dates (see 5.10.1).

FIGURE 18. Bar code marking on unit and intermediate containers.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

58

5.4.5 Placement of identification 2D (PDF417) and linear (Code 39) bar code marking

on exterior shipping containers, palletized unit loads, and unpacked items.

a. Bar code placement shall be adjacent to identification marking as specified in the 5.3

subparagraphs.

b. A DoD shipment packaged in an overpack enclosure (protective outer packaging or 

palletized unit load) for convenience of handling during transportation is exempt from 

identification marking under the following conditions: the overpack enclosure is not an 

assorted-items pack (see 5.1.2.1), the cargo is non-hazardous, the unpacked items or containers 

within the overpack enclosure are marked/tagged with identification information in accordance 

with this standard, and the overpack enclosure is not intended for storage at destination. This 

exemption does not include the documentation requirements identified in 5.11.

5.4.5.1 Printing layout configurations for identification linear (Code 39) bar code data 

on exterior shipping containers, palletized unit loads, and unpacked items (see Figure 19). If

linear (Code 39) bar codes are marked on exterior shipping containers, palletized unit loads, or 

unpacked items, they shall be applied as illustrated in one of the following configurations, listed 

in order of preference.

FIGURE 19. Typical linear (Code 39) bar code configurations for use 

on exterior containers and on tags.

a. A one-stack configuration with data fields stacked from top to bottom to include: 

NSN, contract number, CAGE code of the company awarded the contract, CLIN (if used), 

contractor shipment number, and serial number(s) (if assigned). When a stacked configuration 

is used, bar codes shall be left justified (left-hand (start) characters vertically aligned). For an 

example of the one-stack configuration see Figure 19.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

59

b. A two-stack combination or staggered configuration arranged so that the NSN is 

above the contract number in the first stack and the CAGE code is in the second stack (see 

Figure 19).

c. A three-stack horizontal combination or staggered configuration (see Figure 16B).

5.4.5.2 Tag marking configurations for linear (Code 39) identification bar codes to be

used with exterior shipping containers, palletized unit loads, and unpacked items (see Figure 19). 

Any linear (Code 39) bar code configuration discussed herein may be applied to a tag attached to 

a shipping container, palletized unit load, or unpacked item. Tags shall be marked by either 

direct marking or by applying pressure-sensitive labels. If space is available on the identification 

tag, the identification linear (Code 39) bar code label/marking may be applied to the right or 

below the identification marking. If space is not available, the linear (Code 39) bar code 

label/marking may be applied on the reverse side of the tag.

5.4.5.3 2D (PDF417) bar code configuration. See Appendix A for 2D (PDF417 and 

Macro PDF417) bar code requirements and data semantics technical information. If the encoded 

data volume exceeds the capacity of a single 2D (PDF417) bar code, Macro PDF417 bar codes 

(i.e. multiple linked bar codes– see Figure 20) shall be used. The 2D (PDF417) bar code(s) shall 

be placed in close proximity to the identification marking.

NOTE: Example is actual size and can be used for scanner testing.

FIGURE 20. Macro PDF417 bar codes on exterior container label.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

60

5.4.5.4 Label protection for exterior shipping containers, palletized unit loads, or 

unpacked items. A waterproof, untinted/transparent, plastic, protective laminate such as ASTM 

D5486/D5486M, type I, class 2 tape, or equivalent protection, shall be applied to or shall be 

inherent to the label.

5.4.5.5 Boxes and crates under 10 cubic feet and those 10 cubic feet and over (see

Figures 21 and 22). Regardless of size, the NSN/NATO stock number, contract or order number 

(if appropriate), CAGE code, CLIN (when used), contractor shipment number, UII(s), and 

assigned serial number(s) shall be encoded in machine-readable bar codes using the required data 

carrier(s) and applied to the identification-marked side of all boxes and crates used as exterior 

shipping containers. If used, the linear (Code 39) bar codes shall be located above, to the right of 

or below the identification marking and shall be in a horizontal (picket fence) configuration. The 

2D (PDF417) bar code shall be located in close proximity to the identification marking.

FIGURE 21. Exterior container bar code marking on boxes and crates

under 10 cubic feet.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

61

a. For boxes and crates 10 cubic feet and over, the identification bar code marking

should also be placed on one end of the container.

b. The identification bar code marking shall be applied at least 2 inches (50.8 mm) from 

the top and bottom edges and at least 1 inch (25.4 mm) from the side edges of the box or crate. 

A quiet zone of at least 0.25 inch (6.35 mm) from the ends of the bar code to the nearest 

identification marking shall be maintained. When identification bar codes are located above or 

below identification marking, a separation of at least 0.125 inch (3.18 mm) shall be maintained 

between the marking and the bar code. If cleats, strapping, or other required marking may 

interfere with the placement of identification bar code marking, the identification bar code 

marking shall be placed as near as practicable to the prescribed data.

FIGURE 22. Exterior container bar code marking on boxes and crates

10 cubic feet and over.

5.4.5.6 Bales, cloth-covered bundles, paper shipping sacks, bags and textile/laminated

textile bags, rods, shafts, pipes, and coils of wire (see Figure 23). Identification bar code 

marking shall be placed either on the container surface or on identification tags, using the 

required data carrier(s). When tags are used for these items, the tags shall be secured as shown. 

If used, linear (Code 39) bar code formats shall be as described in 5.4.5.2. Identification bar 

code marking on coils of wire shall be applied to either side of both identification tags.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

62

FIGURE 23. Bar code tagged materiel.

5.4.5.7 Barrels, drums, and other cylindrical containers (see Figure 24). The 2D 

(PDF417) bar code shall be applied in close proximity to the identification marking. 

Identification bar code marking shall not be placed on the tear strip or container seam.

FIGURE 24. Bar code marking on cylindrical containers.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

63

a. Greater than five gallons. If used, linear (Code 39) bar code marking shall be applied 

adjacent to the identification marking on the upper one-third of containers that are greater than 

five gallons.

b. Five gallons or less. If used, identification linear (Code 39) bar code marking shall 

be applied immediately to the right of or below identification marking on containers five 

gallons or less and shall be at least 1 inch (25.4 mm) from the bottom and top edges of the 

container. Stacked bar code configurations shall be left justified.

c. Cylindrical containers. If applied on cylindrical containers less than 5 inches 

(12.7 cm) in diameter, identification linear (Code 39) bar code labels or marking shall be 

vertical or in a ladder configuration. When the bar code is placed in this configuration, the bars 

are placed 0.25 to 0.5 inch (6.35 to 12.70 mm) from the left edge of the identification marking.

d. Marking on the tops of barrels, drums, and other cylindrical containers (see Figure

24). When identification marking is applied to the tops of empty or filled shipping containers 

such as barrels and drums, the identification bar code marking shall be applied beneath the

identification marking. This is in addition to the bar code marking using the required data 

carrier(s), in 5.4.5.7.a and b. When marking reusable containers, all identification bar code 

marking that was applied for previous shipments or for storage shall be obliterated prior to 

application of current identification bar code marking.

5.4.5.8 Reels or spools of cable, wire, and rope (see Figure 25). The 2D (PDF417) bar 

code shall be placed in close proximity to the identification marking. If used, linear (Code 39) 

bar code marking shall be applied adjacent to or beneath the identification marking. On other 

than wood reels or spools, the surface shall be prepared and the labels applied in accordance with 

5.4.3.1. For wood reels or spools see 5.4.3.2.

5.4.5.9 Paper- and cloth-wrapped rolls (see Figure 25). The 2D (PDF417) bar code shall 

be placed in close proximity to the identification marking. If used, linear (Code 39) bar code 

marking shall be applied to the right or below the identification marking.

5.4.5.10 Palletized unit loads (see Figure 25). The 2D (PDF417) bar code shall be 

placed in close proximity to the identification marking. If used, linear (Code 39) bar code 

marking shall be applied to the outside of the load immediately to the right of or below the 

identification marking on a marking board/panel or on the identification-marked side(s) of the 

load, as appropriate (see 5.3.2.7). If the individual containers that comprise the load are marked 

with bar codes and are scanable, no additional bar code marking is required.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

64

FIGURE 25. Bar code marking on miscellaneous materiel.

5.4.5.11 Unpacked major equipment (skidded or unskidded) (see Figure 8). The 2D 

(PDF417) bar code shall be placed in close proximity to the identification marking. If used, 

linear (Code 39) bar code marking shall be applied immediately to the right of the identification 

marking. If a marking board/panel is used, the bar codes shall be applied as specified in 5.4.5.5.

5.4.5.12 Bundled wood products. Identification bar code marking for bundled wood 

products shall be applied on a marking board or panel as specified in 5.4.5.5.

5.4.5.13 Small arms weapons container and palletized unit load labels (see Figure 15). 

Bar code label requirements shall be as follows:

a. Identification bar code labels used on other than wood and wood containers/surfaces

shall comply with the requirements specified in 5.4.3.1 and 5.4.3.2 respectively.

b. Identification bar code labels on unit, intermediate and exterior containers, and 

palletized unit loads shall comply with requirements specified in section 5.4. The style shall be 

specified in the contract or purchase order.

5.5 Customer direct (formerly direct vendor delivery (DVD)). Unless otherwise 

specified in the contract or solicitation, contractor- or vendor-originated customer direct

shipments require identification and address marking with 2D (PDF417) and linear (Code 39) 

bar codes in accordance with this standard. The issue/receipt bar code marking shall either be 

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

65

placed on or printed on labels affixed to either the DD Form 250/250c or the commercial packing 

list. If placed on the DD Form 250/250c, they should be in blocks 15, 16, 17, etc. In either case, 

these documents shall be furnished in a packing list envelope as specified in 5.11.2.a. The 

issue/receipt bar code marking shall be provided in three bar codes (see below) containing data 

as described in DLM 4000.25-1, Appendices 1.35 and 2; and DLM 4000.25-2, Appendix 2. The 

human-readable interpretation is printed directly below each linear (Code 39) bar code.

a. Bar code: The document number and suffix (if applicable) for a maximum 15 

characters. It may be referred to in a contract/order as the requisition number.

b. Bar code: The 13 digit national stock number (NSN) and 2 additional (Add) codes as 

applicable. In the absence of the NSN and Add code, the CAGE and part number shall be used 

for a maximum of 15 characters.

c. Bar code: The 3 character inventory control point routing identifier code (RIC), 2 

character unit of issue (UI) code, 5 digit zero filled quantity (QTY), 1 character condition code 

(COND), blank or last 2 characters of the distribution code (DIST), and a 7 digit or 11 digit zero 

filled unit price (UP) showing dollars and cents with no decimal. The bar code shall have a 

fixed length of 20 or 24 characters to include leading zeros and blanks depending on the 

implemented version of the unit price annotation noted in DLM 4000.25-1, Appendix 3.48.

5.6 Foreign Military Sales (FMS) marking requirements. Identification and address 

marking for unit packs, intermediate and exterior containers, palletized unit loads, and for 

unpacked items shall be applied as specified in 0, 5.1.2, 5.2, and 5.4.5. Identification bar code 

container marking for FMS shipments is required unless otherwise specified in the contract or 

purchase order. Bar coding of the MSL for FMS materiel shipments is required. In addition, the 

following special requirements shall apply to FMS shipments.

5.6.1 Minimum package size. The minimum size box used for FMS shipments shall 

have enough surface area on the top and two sides to affix all required labels, packing lists, DD 

Forms 250 (Material Inspection and Receiving Report), DD Forms 1348-1A, and any other 

required marking without overstamping or overlapping. Identification bar codes shall be legible 

and readable. Nothing shall be placed or appear on the ends or bottom of the box, package, or 

container. A packing list is required.

5.6.2 FMS assorted-items pack. All FMS shipment packs containing assorted items 

(related or unrelated) shall be marked as a “MULTIPACK” as specified in 5.1.2.1.

5.6.3 Contractor-originated FMS shipments. The DD Form 250 shall be used as a 

packing list for contractor-originated FMS shipments in lieu of the DD Form 1348-1A, which 

may be used for FMS shipments originated by DoD activities. The DD Form 250 shall be 

prepared as specified in the Defense Federal Acquisition Regulation Supplement (DFARS), 

Appendix F, Part 3, F301, Preparation Instructions. Distribution of the DD Form 250 shall be 

made in accordance with the DFARS, Appendix F, Part 4, and any other specific information 

contained in the contract or purchase order. For additional information on the DD Form 250, see 

5.11.2.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

66

5.6.4 DoD originated FMS shipments. FMS shipments shall be accomplished as shown 

in Figure 26 as authorized by chapters 5 and 6 of DLM 4000.25-1, which also authorizes 

reprinting of additional copies of the DD Form 1348-1A.

FIGURE 26. Distribution of the DD Form 1348-1A for FMS shipments.

a. One copy of the DD Form 1348-1A shall be retained by the shipper.

b. One copy of the DD Form 1348-1A shall be placed inside the container and one copy 

of the same form shall be affixed to the exterior of the container for each item that is inside the 

container. One of these copies shall be the original. Except for sensitive and/or classified 

items, there are no exceptions to this requirement. Palletized unit loads shall also require a DD 

Form 1348-1A packing list copy, as applicable (see 5.11).

c. One copy of the DD Form 1348-1A shall be forwarded (annotated with either the 

Government bill of lading or the commercial bill of lading number) to the address of the 

appropriate freight forwarder indicated by the Type of Address Code obtained from the Military 

Assistance Program Address Directory (MAPAD).

d. Additional copies of the DD Form 1348-1A may be needed for the notice of 

availability (NOA).

5.7 Shipments to NATO countries or shipments using NATO carriers. Shipments to 

NATO country installations/forces (other than US managed/operated) shall be marked as 

specified herein and in NATO Standardization Agreement (STANAG) 4281 for the marking and 

STANAG 4329 for the bar coding of military cargo.

5.8 Marking for specific commodities.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

67

5.8.1 Household goods. Household goods shall be marked in accordance with DTR 

4500.9-R, Part IV.

5.8.2 Medical material. Medical material shall be marked for shipment and storage as 

specified in the latest edition of Medical Marking Standard No. 1.

5.8.3 Subsistence. DLA designated subsistence materials shall be marked in accordance 

with DLA Troop Support Form 3556 (Subsistence).

5.8.4 Bulk cargo. Where the transportation conveyance is the only exterior container, 

such as for liquids, ore, or grains, the shipment shall be documented in accordance with the 

contract.

5.8.5 Petroleum products. Petroleum products shall be marked for shipment and storage 

as specified in MIL-STD-290.

5.9 Passive radio frequency identification (RFID). Passive RFID shall be used within 

DoD and by contractors/vendors in accordance with the DoD Suppliers’ Passive RFID 

Information Guide (http://www.acq.osd.mil/log/sci/ait.html) and the DTR Part II, Chapter 208 

(http://www.transcom.mil/dtr/dtrHome/).

5.9.1 Passive RFID tag technical requirements. Unless otherwise specified in the 

contract or solicitation, DoD and contractors/vendors shipping or delivering to the DoD shall use 

passive RFID tags that comply with the EPCglobal Class 1, Generation 2 RFID tag 

specifications.

a. Passive RFID tags shall be applied to case shipments and palletized unit load 

shipments.

b. Bulk commodities shall not be tagged in accordance with passive RFID tagging 

requirements. Bulk commodities are products carried or shipped in rail tank cars; tanker trucks; 

other bulk, wheeled conveyances; or pipelines. Examples of bulk commodities are: sand, 

gravel, bulk liquids (water, chemicals, or petroleum), ready-mix concrete or similar construction 

materials, coal, or combustibles such as firewood, and agricultural products (seeds, grains, 

animal feeds and the like).

5.9.1.1 Passive RFID tag data specifications. DoD tag data specifications and passive 

RFID tag formats for data constructs are located in the DoD Suppliers’ Passive RFID 

Information Guide.

5.9.1.2 Passive RFID tag frequency. The DoD approved frequency range for passive 

RFID tags is 860-960 MHz.

5.9.2 Passive RFID tag placement. A passive RFID tag may be integrated with the 

military or commercial shipping label (RFID-enabled address label) or it may be placed in a 

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

68

separate location on the shipment. This standard identifies recommended locations for the 

RFID-enabled address label and passive RFID tag placement. See 5.9.3 for 

ammunition/explosives applications.

5.9.2.1 Individual shipping container or palletized unit load. RFID-enabled address 

labels and/or passive RFID tags should be affixed at a suitable location where there is a 

minimum risk of damage, easy access to the respective bar codes, and the highest potential for 

successful passive RFID tag interrogation.

a. RFID-enabled address labels shall be applied to shipping containers or palletized unit 

loads per 5.3.2, including applicable sub-paragraphs.

(1) The RFID-enabled label should not be placed over a seam nor should 

sealing tape or bands be placed over the label in a manner that interferes 

with the scanning of the label bar codes or reading the transponder data.

(2) The RFID-enabled label should not be placed in a manner that overlaps any 

other existing RF transponder. There should be at least a 4 inch (10.2 cm)

separation.

(3) To preclude inventory and receipt issues associated with pallet-level data, 

the RFID-enabled tag attached to a palletized unit load should not be 

applied to an exterior container within the load.

b. If RFID-enabled address labels are not used, then attach a separate passive RFID tag 

and a separate address label(s).

(1) Address labels should be affixed in accordance with the provisions of 5.3.2, 

including applicable sub-paragraphs.

(2) Parcel carriers may require the placement of commercial address label 

carrier information on the top of a shipping container in addition to 

customer and supplier information that would continue to be placed on 

address labels in accordance with the provisions of 5.3.2. Shippers are 

referred to ANSI MH10.8.1 for guidance concerning address label formats 

and locations for carrier, customer, and supplier information.

(3) The passive RFID tag should be placed on the identification marked side 

within the same boundary locations as noted for the address labels on 

shipping containers or palletized unit loads as per 5.3.2, including applicable 

sub-paragraphs.

(4) A passive RFID tag should not be placed in a manner that overlaps any other 

existing radio frequency (RF) transponder. There should be at least a 4 inch 

(10.2 cm) separation.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

69

(5) To preclude inventory and receipt issues associated with pallet-level data, 

the RFID tag attached to a palletized unit load should not be applied to an 

exterior container within the load.

5.9.2.2 Exterior containers within a palletized unit load. These containers will not 

usually be marked with an address label and therefore require only that the passive RFID tag be 

affixed at a suitable location where there is a minimum risk of damage and the highest potential 

for successful passive RFID tag interrogation (see 5.9.2.1.b).

5.9.3 Tagging munitions/explosives with passive RFID. Munitions and explosives shall 

not be tagged until the certification requirements for hazards of electromagnetic radiation to 

ordnance (HERO) are met for the passive RFID tag, tag reader, and antenna configuration. For 

additional information, refer to the Automated Movement and Identification Solutions website at 

http://www.pdamis.army.mil/Contracts/prfidii/prfidii.html and contact the Contracting Officer's 

Representative at the phone number listed.

5.9.4 Electronic data interchange (EDI) transactions. Advance Shipment Notice (ASN) 

transactions (EDI 856), Shipment Status transactions (EDI IC 856S), or Consolidated Shipment 

Notice transactions (EDI IC 856A) shall be used to link the passive RFID tag to the content level 

detail information associated with each of the container types in accordance with DFARS 

252.211-7006 guidance. Consignors shall transmit these EDI transactions to consignees in 

advance of shipment. For additional information, refer to http://www2.dla.mil/J-6/dlmso/

elibrary/TransFormats/140_997.asp and http://www.transcom.mil/dteb/.

5.10 Special marks and labels. The special marking discussed in this standard are 

examples of the types of special marking that may be specified in a contract or purchase order. 

Every contract or solicitation shall include all special marking requirements applicable to the 

contract. Unless otherwise specified, the special marking shall be placed in a conspicuous 

location on the identification-marked side of the applicable container, palletized unit load, or 

unpacked item.

5.10.1 Shelf-life marking (see Figure 28). Shelf-life marking shall be shown as part of 

the item identification data on unit packs, intermediate containers, exterior containers, and 

unpacked items. Shelf-life marking shall include the manufactured, cured, assembled or packed 

date (apply one date), and the expiration or inspect/test date, as appropriate. Shelf-life marking

can be specified in solicitations or contracts, purchase orders, purchase descriptions, 

specifications and material standards. All shelf-life marking shall be based on shelf-life codes 

(SLC) (see Table IV). In accordance with DoD 4140.27-M, there are two types of shelf-life 

items. Type I shelf-life items have a definite non-extendible period of shelf life. They are 

assigned alpha shelf-life codes (SLCs) (excluding “X”). Type II shelf-life items have an 

assigned shelf-life time period that may be extended after completion of visual inspection, 

certified laboratory test, or restorative action. Type II items are assigned numeric SLCs and “X”. 

Items that are assigned a SLC of zero (non-deteriorative) do not require shelf-life marking. For 

definitions of the assembled date, cured date, expiration date, inspect/test date, manufactured 

date, and packed date, see Table III.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

70

a. For Type I shelf-life items, the mark includes: manufactured (MFD) date, cured date, 

assembled date, packed date (subsistence only) (apply one date, as appropriate), and expiration 

(EXP) date (see note). For items that contain rubber or synthetic elastomers, the expiration date 

shall be calculated from the cured date of the rubber/elastomer.

b. For Type II shelf-life items, the mark includes: manufactured date (MFD), cured 

date, assembled date, packed date (subsistence only) (apply one date, as appropriate), and

inspect/test (INSP/TEST) date (see note). For items that contain rubber or synthetic elastomers, 

the inspect/test date shall be calculated from the cured date of the rubber/elastomer.

EXAMPLE 1 (TYPE I)

MFD DATE 10/13

EXP DATE 10/14

EXAMPLE 2 (TYPE II)

ASSEMBLED DATE 10/13

INSP/TEST DATE 10/16

EXAMPLE 3 (TYPE II)

CURED DATE 4Q13

INSP/TEST DATE 4Q18

NOTE: The words “TYPE I” or “TYPE II” shall not be applied as part of the shelf-life marking. 

For other than cure dated items (see examples 1 and 2), the manufactured date, assembled date, 

packed date, expiration date, and the inspect/test date shall be expressed by the numeric month 

followed by the last two digits of the calendar year, with the day of the month being the last day. 

For cure dated items, the cured date, expiration date, and the inspect/test date (see example 3) 

shall be expressed by the calendar quarter followed by the last two digits of the calendar year, 

with the day of the quarter being the last day. When two or more unit packs of the same item are 

consolidated within any intermediate or exterior containers and have different shelf-life dates, 

the earliest dates shall be shown on those containers.

c. Prior to issue or shipment, Type II shelf-life materiel that has been extended to a new 

inspect/test date, shall have a DD Form 2477 (see Figure 27 - size 1, 2 or 3) applied as specified 

in DoD 4140.27-M.

FIGURE 27. DD Form 2477-1, Extended Shelf Life.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

71

5.10.2 Project code marking (see Figure 28). When a project code has been assigned or 

is specified in a solicitation or contract, project code labels shall be applied to exterior 

containers, palletized unit loads, or unpacked items. The project code shown in the solicitation, 

contract or purchase order (e.g., ARI, ABC, etc.), shall appear in the address and also on a white 

label having a disc of a highly contrasting color superimposed on it. If more than one project is 

required, all project codes may be put on one label. Label sizes shall be 3 by 3 inches (76.2 by 

76.2 mm) with a 2 inch (50.8 mm) diameter disc or 9 by 9 inches (22.9 by 22.9 cm) with a 6 inch 

(15.2 cm) diameter disc, with both having proportionate contrasting lettering. The project code 

may also be applied directly on a container. When marking is applied by tags, the project code 

shall be placed on the identification tag adjacent to the identification marking. The project code 

marking shall be applied as follows:

FIGURE 28. Examples of special marking (shelf life, project code, and 

transportation special handling/protective services marking).

a. Rectangular containers, consolidation containers, and palletized loads - two discs, 

one on the identification side and one on the opposite side (in addition to the container discs).

b. Cylindrical containers - two discs equally spaced on the circumference.

c. Irregularly shaped containers and loose or unpacked items - stenciled or printed on 

the identification-marked side of a tag.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

72

d. Vehicles or other major unpacked items - one disc on the marking board, or one disc 

applied directly on a vehicle by a waterproof, pressure-sensitive tape such as ASTM 

D5486/D5486M. The tape shall be placed over the label and extend a minimum 0.5 inch 

(12.7 mm) from all edges of the label.

e. Postal – one disc adjacent to the address marking.

f. SEAVANs - not marked. However, containers or items comprising the load shall be 

marked.

5.10.3 Transportation special handling/protective services (see Figure 28). Nonhazardous shipments moving by military controlled aircraft (including military contract airlift) 

requiring special handling/protective services shall have a DD Form 1387-2 (Special Handling 

Data/Certification) label affixed to the exterior container, palletized unit load, or unpacked item. 

The form shall be prepared as specified in DTR 4500.9-R, Part II for non-hazardous, 

classified/protected materiel. It shall be placed on the same side of the container, palletized unit 

load, or unpacked item as the address marking. Non-hazardous materiel moving by military 

controlled aircraft such as items subject to damage by heat or freezing and life or death 

shipments also require a completed DD Form 1387-2.

5.10.4 Structural marking. When required, structural marking such as “REMOVE TOP 

FIRST” or “TO OPEN TOP: REMOVE SCREWS” shall be placed on shipping containers on or 

near the structure described. Containers designated as “reusable” shall include sufficient 

structural marking to provide instructions for opening and unpacking without causing damage to 

the container, packing materials, and the container's contents.

5.10.5 Valuable and security items. When items such as certain drugs, narcotics, 

precious metals, currency, jewelry, cameras, and similar type valuables are shipped, marking

shall be as specified by the cognizant activity or as required by regulation or statute. When no 

marking requirements are specified, marking shall be as prescribed in 0 and 5.1.2. Alcohol or 

alcoholic beverages shall be documented and marked in accordance with U.S. Treasury 

Department regulations.

5.10.6 Special handling, including arrows and FRAGILE or DELICATE marking (see

Figure 29). All containers shall have appropriate caution marking applied. Special handling 

marking such as “TOP”, “UP”, “THIS SIDE UP”, “GLASS”, “KEEP DRY”, “PERISHABLE”, 

“KEEP FROZEN”, “FRAGILE” or “DELICATE” shall be placed on shipping containers, as 

applicable. The marking shall not interfere with or obscure other marking. Containers of fragile

or delicate items shall be marked with a fragile label or by stenciling or stamping the word 

“FRAGILE” or “DELICATE” on the container. When space permits, “FRAGILE” or 

“DELICATE” marking shall be placed on the identification-marked side and one end of a 

rectangular container, and on two equally spaced areas on the circumference of a cylindrical 

container. Special handling illustrations are contained in ASTM D5445.

5.10.6.1 Legend “USE NO HOOKS” (see Figure 29). The legend “USE NO HOOKS”

in letters not less than 1.5 inches (38.1 mm) in height shall be stenciled on both sides of shipping 

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

73

containers in which the contents are susceptible to damage by the use of hooks. In addition, a 

hook symbol with a superimposed “X” sufficiently heavy to convey the intended prohibitory use 

of the hooks shall be placed directly above the legend.

5.10.6.2 Arrows (see Figure 29). When containers are required to be stacked or the top 

surface shall remain up, two sides of a rectangular container and two equidistant points on the 

circumference of a cylindrical container shall be marked or labeled “UP” with an arrow pointing 

toward the top of the container. The arrow shall be not less than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in length and 

its overall size shall be proportionate to the available space. Arrows are to be used only to 

indicate the words “UP” or “TOP”.

FIGURE 29. Examples of special marking (FRAGILE, UP, arrows,

USE NO HOOKS and warranty marking).

5.10.7 Warranty marking (see Figure 29). When an item is procured with a warranty 

agreement, warranty marking shall be applied to all containers. Applicable warranty marking 

shall be placed on containers of serviceable/unserviceable materiel shipped from field units. 

Warranty marking shall indicate the time period or condition of the warranty (e.g., days/months, 

hours of operation, etc.). Warranty marking shall be applied by labeling, tagging, or printing and 

shall be prefaced by the words “WARRANTED ITEM”. All warranty information, including

“WARRANTED ITEM”, shall be in upper case letters of the same style font. The marking shall 

be located adjacent to or below the identification marking. For an assorted-items pack that 

contains items covered by a warranty, the words “WARRANTED ITEMS INSIDE” shall be 

placed immediately below the identification marking.

Examples of warranty marking are:

WARRANTED ITEM WARRANTED ITEM WARRANTED ITEM

WARRANTY EXPIRES WARRANTY EXPIRES WARRANTY GOOD FOR

AFTER 1000 HOURS 1 JANUARY 2003 180 DAYS FROM DATE

OF OPERATION ITEM IS PUT INTO USE

5.10.8 Pictorial symbols for marking (see Figure 30). Containers shall be marked with 

pictorial symbols to indicate special handling and storage needs, such as Temperature Limits, Do 

Not Stack, Do Not Drop, Do Not Roll, Clamp Here, Fragile Handle With Care, Keep Away 

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

74

From Heat, and Keep Away From Cold. They may appear on a label or be printed directly on 

the package. Affirmative symbols need not be framed by borderlines, but all negative symbols, 

that is, “Do Not .......” shall have borders with a slash mark across. Additional pictorial marking 

symbols and their application are illustrated in ASTM D5445.

FIGURE 30. Examples of pictorial symbols.

5.10.9 Lag bolt caution marking. Demountable crates shall be conspicuously marked 

with the words “REMOVE LAG BOLTS BEFORE OPENING”.

5.10.10 Method 50 (see Figure 31). Packs with desiccant shall bear a cautionary 

marking on the identification-marked side to alert personnel that the item is preserved with 

desiccant and shall not be opened prior to use. Items packaged with desiccant shall be 

completely reprocessed with new desiccant after opening. On unit packs and intermediate 

containers, cautionary marking may be applied by any means that provides a high degree of 

visibility and permanence. On exterior containers, the marking may be applied by any means 

that provides the required degree of legibility and durability. When a cautionary marking is 

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

75

applied directly on the container, red marking ink that is waterproof, bleed-resistant, and resistant 

to ultraviolet ray degradation shall be used (see 6.5). When space is not available to permit the 

use of a label, the words “PACKAGED WITH DESICCANT - DO NOT OPEN UNTIL READY 

FOR USE” shall be placed on the container adjacent to the identification marking.

FIGURE 31. Method 50 marking.

5.10.11 Magnetized material. Containers and/or bare items that contain magnetized 

material, as defined in AFMAN 24-204(INTERSERVICE)/TM 38-250/NAVSUP PUB 

505/MCO P4030.19J/DLAI 4145.3, being shipped by military aircraft, shall be marked and 

labeled per said publication. Magnetized material, as defined by IATA and ICAO, shipped by 

commercial air, shall be marked and labeled in accordance with the ICAO and IATA regulations.

5.10.12 Engineering or technical order changes or modifications (see Figure 32). 

Containers of materiel that are furnished for a modification work order (MWO) shall be marked 

with the MWO number preceded by the letters “MWO”. The marking shall be located in the 

lower right-hand corner of the identification-marked side of the container.

5.10.13 Lot, batch, or identification control numbers (see Figure 32). Lot, batch, or 

identification control numbers shall be shown on unit packs, and intermediate and exterior 

containers. They shall be preceded by the proper designation, e.g., LOT NO 5, and shall be 

shown adjacent to the contract number.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

76

FIGURE 32. Examples of special marking (modification work order (MWO)) and lot

number marking on unit packs and intermediate and exterior containers).

5.10.14 Set or assembly marking (see Figure 33). When a set or assembly is placed in 

two or more containers, each container shall be marked with its own number within the set (i.e., 

1 of 2), the total number of containers making up the set (i.e., 2 of 2), and the number of the set 

within each shipment (i.e., Set 1). Set or assembly marking shall be placed in the lower righthand corner of the identification-marked side of the container as shown. A 2 inch (50.8 mm)

disc of a high contrast color shall be placed above the numbers on each container.

5.10.14.1 Set or assembly marking for component parts of disassembled enditems/products (see Figure 33). All component parts of disassembled items/products shall have 

the assigned end-item/product serial number shown in the clear and bar coded on each shipping 

container comprising the applicable set. When an end-item/product is assigned a UII, the UII 

shall be applied to each shipping container comprising the end-item/product applicable set using 

the 2D (PDF417) bar code, which is annotated with a data area title for the encoded information, 

for example “ID DATA INCLUDES UII(s)”. The data area title text is not encoded. Humanreadable interpretation text for the 2D (PDF417) bar code is optional. The required serial 

number (if any) shall be shown immediately below the fractional number that identifies the 

individual container and the total number of containers comprising the set. When an enditem/product that does not have a serial number is disassembled for shipment, a date (month, 

day, and year) followed by a capital letter to identify a set or assembly shall be shown on the 

shipping container in lieu of a serial number. Each set shall bear a different letter. Double letters 

may be used, when appropriate.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

77

FIGURE 33. Examples of special marking (set or assembly marking, with component parts of

disassembled items and single stock-numbered set marking).

5.10.14.2 Single stock-numbered and part-numbered sets (see Figure 33). When the

components of a single stock-numbered or part-numbered item are packed in two or more 

shipping containers or are stored together as a set, the stock number or part number shown on 

each shipping container shall be that of the complete set and shall be prefixed with “P/O”

(part of).

5.10.14.3 Single stock-numbered and part-numbered sets with different stock-numbered

parts (see Figure 34). When a single stock-numbered set or part-numbered set is packed along 

with related parts having different stock numbers, in addition to marking the complete set stock 

number, the stock number(s) of the subordinate components shall be listed at the bottom of the 

container identification marking and shall be prefixed by the words “CONSISTING OF”. The 

component information shall include the quantity and unit of issue.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

78

FIGURE 34. Single stock numbered item consisting of other stock 

numbered items in a single container.

5.10.15 Consolidation containers. Consolidation containers that are shipped to a single 

destination but contain individual shipments/containers for multiple consignees (multiple DoD 

activity address codes) with the same TAC codes shall have the words “MULTIPLE 

DODAACS” applied to the outside of the container below the identification marking. This 

requirement applies to “kits” only if they are individual shipments that are consolidated into one 

container and sent to a single destination for multiple consignees. The size of the marking shall 

be as specified in 4.2.8 and shall be proportionate with the overall size of the consolidation 

container.

5.10.16 Expedited handling - not mission capable supply (NMCS) and 999 (see Figure

35). Requisitions and contracts identified as NMCS shipments shall have an NMCS code shown 

in the RDD block of the address label. The applicable code is 999 or the letter “N”, which may 

be followed by the RDD expressed in the number of days from the date of requisition. NMCS 

condition 999 shipments shall be marked with two 999 labels, one placed adjacent to the address 

marking and one placed on the opposite side of the container. For NMCS conditions other than 

999, one NMCS label shall be placed adjacent to the address marking and one on the opposite 

side of the container.

FIGURE 35. Examples of expedited handling labels.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

79

5.10.17 Center of balance and lifting and tiedown points (see Figure 36). Handling 

information shall be marked as follows:

FIGURE 36. Center of balance, load bearing area, and lifting and tiedown points.

a. When the weight of an item is not evenly distributed, a 1 inch (25.4 mm) wide vertical 

line not less than 3 inches (76.2 mm) long locating the center of balance shall be extended up 

from the bottom edge of both sides of the item or its container, regardless of its length. The 

words “CENTER OF BALANCE” shall be clearly marked by any means that provides the 

required degree of legibility and durability in 1 inch (25.4 mm) letters above or alongside the 

line. The center of balance marking is not required on items such as SEAVANs which are not 

handled by forklifts.

b. Unit move cargo shipments have center of balance marking requirements that are in 

addition to the requirements of this standard. For example, all items/cargo 10 feet or longer shall 

be marked with a center of balance; the center of balance shall be marked with a “T” shape; the 

horizontal portion of the “T” shall contain the gross weight information; the vertical portion of 

the “T” shall contain the letters “CB” and the number of inches from the reference data line of 

the center of balance location shall also be indicated. Additional differences are applicable as 

specified in DTR 4500.9-R Part III, Appendix P.

c. On unboxed equipment and vehicles, the identification of lifting or tiedown provisions 

used for transport shall be stenciled in locations on the exterior of the equipment in letters not 

less than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in height. Accessories resembling provisions for lifting or tiedown 

shall be located or designed to avoid mistaken use as unacceptable for lifting or tiedown. On 

vehicles that are painted white, yellow, or another light color, the sling or lift points marking

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

80

shall be black, and the words “LIFT HERE” with an arrow pointing to the lifting eyes, placed 

above or alongside the lifting eyes. When space does not permit, the size of the arrow and 

lettering may be reduced accordingly.

d. CARC paint or ink shall be used, when appropriate.

5.10.18 Load bearing areas and forklift entry points (see Figure 36). When exterior 

shipping containers and their contents are subject to damage caused by uneven container stresses 

or strains, load bearing areas and lift points shall be marked on the exterior of the container. The 

words “LOAD BEARING AREA” shall be marked on opposite panels of the container directly 

over the load bearing area. The words “FORKLIFT AREA” shall be placed directly over the 

forklift entry points.

5.10.19 Axle weight marking. When axle weight marking is required, it shall be marked 

above each axle by stenciling or printing in 1 inch (25.4 mm) letters the words “AXLE WT”

followed by the weight in pounds. The size of the lettering may be reduced, when necessary. 

When marking directly on the equipment, paint shall be soluble in paint thinner or mineral 

spirits. CARC paint or ink shall be used when appropriate.

5.10.20 Electrostatic discharge (ESD) sensitive devices (see Figure 37). All unit packs 

and intermediate and exterior containers of ESD sensitive devices that are susceptible to damage 

from ESD shall be marked as follows:

Unit pack symbol/label Exterior and intermediate

container label

FIGURE 37. ESD sensitive devices attention symbols and labels.

5.10.20.1 ESD unit packs. The unit packs shall be marked with the ESD sensitive 

devices attention label prescribed by ASTM D5445. The label shall include the ESD sensitive 

device symbol (triangle and reaching hand), the words “ATTENTION STATIC SENSITIVE 

DEVICES”, and the statement “HANDLE ONLY AT STATIC SAFE WORK STATIONS”. 

The symbol and lettering on the label shall be marked in black on a yellow background.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

81

5.10.20.2 ESD intermediate and exterior containers. The containers shall be marked 

with the ESD sensitive devices attention label. The label used shall be sized proportionate to the 

size of the container. The ESD sensitive devices symbol and the words “ATTENTION 

OBSERVE PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE SENSITIVE 

DEVICES” shall be marked in black on a yellow background. One label shall be placed on the 

identification-marked side of an intermediate container. Two labels shall be placed on an 

exterior container. One label shall be placed on the identification-marked side (or surface), and 

one label shall be placed on the opposite side (or surface). If the label is temporarily unavailable, 

intermediate and exterior containers shall be marked with the ESD sensitive devices symbol and 

the words “ATTENTION OBSERVE PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING ELECTROSTATIC 

DISCHARGE SENSITIVE DEVICES”. The minimum size of the symbol shall be 0.625 inch 

(15.9 mm) measured vertically at the base of the triangle. When preprinted labels are not used, 

the symbol shall be printed in black or the same color as the identification marking, if other than 

black.

5.10.21 Materiel condition marking. As prescribed in TM 38-400/NAVSUP 

PUB572/AFJMAN 23-210/MCO 4450.14/DLAM 4145.12, materiel condition tags or labels 

shall be used whenever materiel may become mixed during storage or shipment within or 

between installations, or where physical evidence is necessary for materiel control to prevent 

duplicate inspections, or both. Implementation of this requirement by the respective departments 

and agencies will afford specific guidance concerning use and application. Tags and labels shall 

conform to the color, design, and material (to include the strength of the paperboard) of the 

Government produced item. Computer-generated, adhesive-backed labels may be used in 

conjunction with materiel condition tags. The following forms are authorized for use to indicate 

the condition(s) of the materiel and to identify the individual article or contents of the package, 

bundle, or container to which they are securely attached. These forms are not for indiscriminate 

use on serviceable materiel that presents no problem in storage and transfer. One tag or label 

shall be applied to the item and one shall be applied to the identification side of the shipping 

container. This application is in addition to the marking requirements in this standard. If 

multiple items or unit packs are placed in a single shipping container, then each item or unit pack 

shall be labeled or tagged.

a. DD Form 1574 (Serviceable Tag - Materiel) and DD Form 1574-1 (Serviceable Label

- Materiel). Use for materiel that is serviceable (e.g., issuable without qualification, issuable 

with qualification, or priority issue). The tag and label shall have yellow borders and letters. 

When preprinted letters are not legible, black lettering may be used. To assist in identification, 

a 1 by 5 inch (2.54 by 12.7 cm) yellow stripe may also be printed on the back of each tag.

b. DD Form 1577-2 (Unserviceable (Reparable) Tag - Materiel) and DD Form 1577-3

(Unserviceable (Reparable) Label - Materiel). Use for materiel that is unserviceable (e.g., 

limited restoration, reclamation, reparable, or incomplete). The tag and label shall have green 

borders and letters. To assist in identification, a 1 by 5 inch green stripe may also be printed on 

the back of each tag.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

82

c. DD Form 1577 (Unserviceable (Condemned) Tag - Materiel) and DD Form 1577-1

(Unserviceable (Condemned) Label – Materiel). Use for materiel that is unserviceable (e.g.,

condemned or scrap). The tag and label shall have red borders and letters. To assist in 

identification, a 1 by 5 inch red stripe may also be printed on the back of each tag.

d. DD Form 1575 (Suspended Tag - Materiel) and DD Form 1575-1 (Suspended Label

– Materiel). Use for materiel that is suspended (e.g., stocks awaiting classification, returns 

awaiting classification, ammunition suitable for emergency combat use only, reclaimed items 

awaiting condition determination, quality deficiency exhibits, or stocks that are being held 

pending negotiation or litigation). The tag and label shall have brown borders and letters. To 

assist in identification, a 1 by 5 inch brown stripe may also be printed on the back of each tag.

e. DD Form 1576 (Test/Modification Tag - Materiel) and DD Form 1576-1

(Test/Modification Label - Materiel). Use for serviceable materiel that requires technical data 

marking, testing, alteration, modification, conversion, disassembly, etc., prior to issue. The tag 

and label shall have blue borders and letters. To assist in identification, a 1 by 5 inch blue stripe 

may also be printed on the back of each tag.

5.10.22 Hardness critical item (HCI). Unit packs, intermediate and exterior containers 

housing items identified on the parts list as “HCI” shall be stamped, stenciled, or labeled with the 

symbol “HCI” or the words “HARDNESS CRITICAL ITEM”. The HCI symbol or wording 

shall be placed on the identification-marked side and the end of the container to the left of the 

identification-marked side of rectangular containers, and on two equally spaced areas on the 

circumference of cylindrical containers. The HCI lettering shall be black in color, and the size of 

the lettering shall conform to the requirements of 4.2.8. On forest-green containers, the HCI 

lettering shall be either yellow or white in color.

5.11 Packing lists and documentation. There are essentially two kinds of packing list

documentation required by this standard: 1) a content packing list for package contents not 

marked on the packaging, to include sets, kits, and assemblies; 2) a shipment packing list for a 

single-piece or multi-piece shipment unit to include applicable shipping information.

a. Packing lists shall be sealed in water resistant envelopes and secured to the exterior of 

the container, palletized load, or unpacked item in the most protected location (see Figure 38).

b. When specified in the contract or purchase order or when requested by the procuring 

activity, contractors shall place a packing list inside each container and to the outside of each 

container or palletized unit load.

5.11.1 Content packing lists for container/palletized load/unpacked items (see Figure

38). The packing list identifies the content-related information not marked on shipment 

packaging. The content-related information should include the NSN, nomenclature, part 

number, quantity, and unit of issue. The use of packing list protectors is recommended.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

83

FIGURE 38. Packing list application.

a. Sets, kits, or assemblies composed of unlike items but identified by a single stock 

number or part number, shall have a packing list (identifying each item) securely attached to the 

end or side of each container. An additional packing list placed inside each container is 

recommended.

b. Sets with two or more exterior shipping containers of different stock numbered or 

part-numbered items require a master packing list. One copy of the master packing list shall be 

attached to container No. 1 and one copy placed inside container No. 1.

c. The contents of packages containing installation or assembly hardware such as 

brackets, connectors, nuts, bolts, and washers shall be listed in detail on the packing list.

d. A “kit contents list” shall be placed inside each “kit container” and shall not be 

included with the packing list on the outside of the exterior container. The kit contents list may 

be placed on a DD Form 250 or on a locally prepared list. This list shall not be included as part 

of the exterior shipping container packing list.

e. Packing lists may include lists of the serial numbers and UIIs prepared in accordance 

with 5.4.1.2.1 and 5.4.1.2.2.

f. No exterior packing list documentation (see Figure 38) is required for containers or 

palletized unit loads of like items or single-item packs when content information, to include all 

included serial numbers and/or UIIs, are marked on a label attached to the boxes/load, 

lithographed on the boxes, or printed on the boxes (see Figure 34). For FMS shipments (see 

5.6), exterior documentation is always required except for controlled, sensitive, or classified 

items.

5.11.2 Shipment packing list and DD Form 1384 (TCMD). A shipment packing list and 

TCMD as identified below shall be attached to the No. 1 piece or lowest numbered exterior 

container or palletized unit load of each shipment unit. For shipment units partialed or split into 

shipment increments in accordance with DTR 4500.9-R, Part II, Appendix L, the shipment 

packing list and TCMD (as applicable) shall be attached to the lowest numbered piece of each 

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

84

shipment unit increment. A packing list envelope may contain a content packing list (see 

5.11.1), a shipment packing list, serial number lists, and a DD Form 1384 (TCMD).

a. DD Form 250 (Material Inspection and Receiving Report). A DD Form 250, when

prepared in accordance with contract requirements using the DFARS, Appendix F shall be used 

as a shipment packing list. Copies shall be in addition to those required for standard distribution 

as specified in the DFARS and each shall be marked “Packing List”. All applicable data shall be 

included on the form. When a DD Form 250 is prepared for a customer direct shipment, it shall 

include issue/receipt bar code marks (see 5.5).

b. DD Form 1155 (Order for Supplies or Services/Request for Quotation). A DD Form 

1155, when used to order supplies, shall be attached to a vendor's commercial packing list and 

applied to applicable exterior containers identified in 5.11.2.

c. DD Form 1149 (Requisition and Invoice Shipping Document). A DD Form 1149 

may be used as a single item or multiple item packing list for non-MILSTRIP DoD shipments 

and shall be applied, when applicable, in the same manner as described for the forms in 5.11.2.1

through 5.11.3.

d. DD Form 1348-1A. The DD Form 1348-1A shall be used by DoD shippers and as 

specified in the contract. It shall be prepared in accordance with 5.12 and DLM 4000.25-1, 

Chapter 5 and attached IAW the following 5.11.2 numbered subparagraphs.

e. DD Form 1384 (Transportation Control and Movement Document (TCMD). A 

TCMD shall be completed when required by and in accordance with DTR 4500.9-R, Part II, 

Cargo Movement, Appendix M, with all entries except for DTS carrier information. It shall be 

inserted in the packing list envelope on the No. 1 container for those shipment units forwarded 

to a CONUS CCP.

5.11.2.1 Shipment units containing a single DD Form 1348-1A (see Figure 39). For 

single line-item shipments, attach a copy of the DD Form 1348-1A to the materiel in shipping 

container No. 1 or palletized unit load No. 1. In addition, enclose at least one copy of the form in 

a water-resistant envelope attached to the outside of the exterior container or palletized unit load 

as noted in 5.11.2. When a storage container is used as a shipping container, the copy attached to 

the material in container No. 1 shall be enclosed with the copy attached to the outside of 

container No. 1.

5.11.2.2 Shipment unit containing multiple DD Forms 1348-1A. For multiple line item 

shipments, place a copy of each DD Form 1348-1A in a water-resistant envelope so the NSN 

identification and requisition information are visible and attach the envelope to the materiel for 

each respective requisition. When a polyethylene bag is used to group single line items for 

packing, the same bag shall contain the DD Form 1348-1A. At least one copy of the form, 

applicable to each requisition, shall also be placed in a water-resistant envelope attached to the 

outside of the exterior container or palletized unit load as noted in 5.11.2.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

85

FIGURE 39. Sample of a DD Form 1348-1A, Issue Release/Receipt

Document (IRRD).

5.11.2.3 Alternate method of attaching DD Forms 1348-1A to fiberboard boxes. When

shrink or stretch film is used to consolidate multiple item items, one copy of the DD Form 1348-

1A shall be attached to the materiel for each line item. For single items, two copies of the 

applicable form shall be placed under the shrink film in such a manner as to be read. This 

method is not authorized for FMS shipments.

5.11.2.4 Method of attaching accompanying documentation for shipments of vehicles. 

A minimum of two copies of the DD Form 1348-1A or DD Form 250 shipping document and 

DA Form 3256, preservation/depreservation guide (if required) shall be provided and shall be 

securely attached in or on the vehicle as follows:

a. Interior. Place one copy of the shipping document and one copy of the preservation/ 

depreservation guide inside a sealed bag or water-resistant envelope. Attach the bag or 

envelope to a conspicuous location inside the vehicle.

b. Exterior. Place the remaining copy of the shipping document and 

preservation/depreservation guide, unit packed as specified above, on the vehicle adjacent to the 

shipping address and securely attach the bag or envelope.

5.11.3 Exceptions to the use of exterior container documentation. With the following 

exceptions, exterior container documentation is required on all contractor, DoD, and FMS 

shipments.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

86

a. For controlled, sensitive, classified, and pilferable items (except for FMS shipments), 

the shipping documentation shall be placed inside all containers rather than on the outside. For 

classified shipments, marking that indicates the classified nature of the materiel and its security 

classification shall not appear on the exterior of each container if it will identify the classified 

nature of the shipment.

b. For DLA Troop Support multiple container shipments of clothing and textile (C&T) 

items, the packing list shall be placed inside the last container to be loaded for each shipment. 

The words “PACKING LIST HERE” shall be marked on the container (see 5.1.2.f.(3)).

5.12 DD Form 1348-1A bar code data requirements (see Figure 39). The following 

encoded data are required on the DD Form 1348-1A.

5.12.1 DD Form 1348-1A linear (Code 39) bar codes.

a. Linear (Code 39) bar coded data with human-readable interpretation for issue to 

Services/agencies.

(1) Document number and suffix assigned to the requisition for a maximum of 

14 characters should be bar coded in block 24.

(2) The 13 digit national stock number (NSN) and 2 additional (Add) codes, as 

applicable, per DLM 4000.25-1, Appendix 2.5.2, should be bar coded in 

block 25. In the absence of the NSN, the CAGE and Part Number shall be 

used for a maximum of 15 characters.

(3) The 3 character “from” routing identifier code (RIC), 2 character unit of 

issue (UI) code, 5 digit zero filled quantity (QTY), 1 character condition 

code (COND), blank or last 2 characters of the distribution code (DIST), 

and a 7 digit or 11 digit zero-filled unit price (UP) showing dollars and cents 

with no decimal bar coded in block 26. The bar code shall have a fixed 

length of 20 or 24 characters to include leading zeros and spaces depending 

on the implemented version of the unit price annotation noted in DLM 

4000.25-1, Appendix 3.48.

b. Linear (Code 39) bar coded data, with human-readable interpretation requirements, 

for issue to FMS/Grant Aid customers.

(1) Block 24. The document number and suffix assigned to the requisition for a 

maximum of 15 characters should be bar coded.

(2) Block 25. The 13 digit national stock number (NSN) and 2 additional (Add) 

codes, as applicable, per DLM 4000.25-1, Appendix 2.5.2, should be bar 

coded. In the absence of the NSN, the CAGE and part number shall be used 

for a maximum of 15 characters.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

87

(3) Block 26. The 2 character unit of issue (UI) code, 5 digit zero filled 

quantity (QTY), 1 character condition code (COND), a 7 digit or 11 digit 

zero-filled unit price (UP) showing dollars and cents with no decimal, and 

the first position and last 3 positions of supplementary address DODAAC 

should be bar coded. The bar code shall have a fixed length of 19 or 23

characters to include leading zeros and spaces depending on the 

implemented version of the unit price annotation noted in DLM 4000.25-1, 

Appendix 3.48. For transfers to DLA Disposition Services, Block 26 shall

not contain bar code data in accordance with DLM 4000.25-1, Appendix 

3.49.

c. The application of linear bar codes on the DD Form 1348-1A and its Continuation 

Page shall be in accordance with 5.4.2.6 and 5.4.2.2. A data check character is not used. The 

following requirements and exceptions apply:

(1) The height of the bar code should be at least 0.5 inch (12.7 mm) and shall be 

no less than 0.25 inch (6.35 mm), regardless of the density (characters per 

inch).

(2) Blocks 24 and 25. The length of the bar code shall not be greater than 4 

inches (10.2 cm). Each bar code shall have 15 characters. When there is an 

absence of any character(s) (less than 15) within these 2 bar codes, encoded 

spaces shall be used as fillers.

(3) Block 26. The length of the bar code shall not be greater than 4.5 inches 

(11.4 cm). Encoded spaces shall be used as fillers for any unknown, or 

unencoded, data characters.

(4) Block 27. The length of the bar codes shall not be greater than 4 inches 

(10.2 cm) for serial numbers that may have up to 30 characters. The narrow 

element X-dimension should be at least 0.010 inch (10 mils or 0.254 mm)

but shall not be less than 0.007 inch (7 mils or 0.178 mm) for these highdensity bar codes. The wide to narrow ratio should be 3 to 1 but shall not be 

less than 2 to 1.

(5) The American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII)

characters encoded shall consist of the standard uppercase characters, 

numbers, and symbols identified in ISO/IEC 16388, Table 1 (i.e.[A to Z][1 

to 9][hyphen][period][space][ $ ][ / ][ + ][ % ][stop/start (*)]. The full 

ASCII 128 character set shall not be used to encode information. Also, 

scanners and imagers shall not be configured to decode the full ASCII 128 

character set for linear (Code 39) bar codes.

5.12.2 DD Form 1348-1A 2D (PDF417) bar code. The 2D (PDF417) bar code shall be 

used in block 27 of the DD Form 1348-1A or a DD Form 1348-1A Continuation Page to enter 

additional data for internal use by the shipping/receiving activity in accordance with DLM 

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

88

4000.25-1, Chapter 5 and Appendix 1.35 and 1.36. The bar code shall encompass all the data 

elements in blocks 24 through 27, including UIIs, and shall be used in addition to the linear 

(Code 39) bar codes. See Figures 39 and 40.

FIGURE 40. Sample of a DD Form 1348-1A, Issue Release/Receipt Document 

(IRRD), Continuation Page (page 1 of 3 and not actual size).

5.13 Hazardous materials (HAZMAT). The marking and labeling requirements for 

shipment and storage of HAZMAT, including ammunition and hazardous wastes, shall be 

accomplished as stated in this standard and in the applicable regulatory documents.

5.13.1 HAZMAT marking and labeling requirements. Depending on the mode of 

transportation, HAZMAT shall be marked and labeled in accordance with Title 49 CFR, ICAO 

Technical Instructions for the Safe Transportation of Dangerous Goods by Air, IATA Dangerous 

Goods Regulations, the IMO IMDG Code for water shipments, and AFMAN 24-

204(INTERSERVICE)/TM 38-250/NAVSUP PUB 505/MCO P4030.19J/DLAI 4145.3 for 

military air shipments, as applicable. Proper shipping names (PSNs), United Nations (UN) or 

North American (NA) HAZMAT identification numbers, IATA/ICAO temporary identification 

(ID) numbers, DOT assigned EX (explosives) numbers (for ammunition items with no assigned 

NSN/DODIC), HAZMAT classification warning labels, and UN Performance-Oriented 

Packaging certification marking shall be placed on the exterior container, as required. 

Government-owned Class I (explosives) that were packaged, marked and labeled prior to 1 

January 1990 and destined for surface shipment or military air shipment need not be remarked.

5.13.2 Proper shipping name and identification number (see Figure 41). The PSN and

NA or UN HAZMAT identification number shall be marked on the exterior shipping container. 

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

89

PSNs for n.o.s. items shall be followed by a technical name in parentheses. The PSNs and 

identification numbers are listed in Title 49 CFR, Part 172.101, latest revision, and in AFMAN 

24-204(INTERSERVICE)/TM 38-250/NAVSUP PUB 505/MCO P4030.19J/DLAI 4145.3, 

Attachment 4. North American numbers are not authorized for international shipments. The 

applicable international modal document shall be used to determine the UN PSN and UN 

HAZMAT identification number for international shipments.

NOTE: “SHELF LIFE” is a placeholder for dates (see 5.10.1).

FIGURE 41. Example of exterior container HAZMAT marking and labeling

requirements.

5.13.3 Marking and labeling of an assorted-items pack containing HAZMAT. When an 

assorted-items pack contains HAZMAT, the PSNs, with applicable ID numbers, shall be marked 

on each applicable container in the assorted-items pack. They shall also be listed on the 

identification-marked side of the assorted-items pack. Applicable HAZMAT classification 

warning labels for each class of material contained in the assorted-items pack shall also be 

applied on the outside surface.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

90

5.13.4 Marking and labeling of air and water shipments. Marking and labeling 

requirements for shipments of HAZMAT by domestic commercial air are specified in Title 49 

CFR and by international air in the ICAO Technical Instructions and the IATA Dangerous 

Goods Regulations. When shipment is by military airlift or contract carrier, the requirements of 

AFMAN 24-204(INTERSERVICE) TM 38-250/NAVSUP PUB 505/MCO P4030.19J/DLAI 

4145.3 shall apply. In addition, for all military air shipments, the outer container of combination 

packages, having inner receptacles that contain a liquid HAZMAT, shall also be marked “AIR 

ELIGIBLE” to verify that either the inner container(s) or the outer container meet the internal 

pressure requirements for air eligibility. This required marking is in addition to any applicable 

UN Performance-Oriented Packaging certification marking (see 5.14.2.f and Figures 41 and 42). 

When known, the tested kilopascals (kPa) may be marked below the “AIR ELIGIBLE” wording. 

A kPa is the international unit for measurement of internal pressure. The formula for converting 

to kilopascals is (psi X 6.89 = kPa). The words “AIR ELIGIBLE” are not required for single 

containers of HAZMAT because the kPa is already a part of the UN Performance-Oriented 

Packaging certification code. The marking and labeling requirements for the shipment of 

HAZMAT by vessel are specified in Title 49 CFR and in the IMO IMDG Code. The IMO 

IMDG Code is used for overseas shipments by vessel.

5.13.5 Identifying containers and packagings (see Figure 41). Containers or 

configurations (packagings) shall be identified as complying with containers identified in the UN 

Performance-Oriented Packaging standards or Federal or military specifications. When a

container that is manufactured to a Government approved drawing, or specification has 

successfully passed all applicable UN Performance-Oriented Packaging certification tests, both 

the UN Performance-Oriented Packaging certification marking (see 5.13.5.1) and applicable 

Government approved drawing or container specification marking shall be applied.

5.13.5.1 DOT specification and UN Performance-Oriented Packaging certification

marking (see Figures 41 and 42). When a container complies with a UN Performance-Oriented 

Packaging standard, the container shall be marked as required by the applicable specification 

conforming to Title 49 CFR, Part 178. This is normally the responsibility of the container 

manufacturer. The symbol indicated in Figure 41 shall be the registered symbol of the 

contractor, packaging manufacturer or DoD/DOT-approved testing facility, or combination 

thereof, who certified the package as successfully passing all of the required tests. For packages 

with a gross mass over 66 pounds, the markings or a duplicate thereof must appear on the top or

on a side of the packaging. The UN symbol and the size of the lettering shall also conform to the 

requirements of Title 49 CFR, Part 178.

5.13.5.2 Specialized containers (see Figure 41). When a container is manufactured to a

Government-approved drawing or specification, it shall be identified as such. When the 

complete package, including cushioning and blocking materials, inner container(s), and the 

shipping container, is covered by a detailed procedure in a specification or Governmentapproved drawing, the applicable specification or packaging drawing shall be marked on the 

container in an inconspicuous location, such as the bottom of the container. This additional 

marking need not be applied to containers with nameplates when the contents are specific to the 

container (e.g., an MK 46 Torpedo in an MK 535 container) or to packages when the entire 

packaged configuration is described by the NSN which is also part of the identification marking. 

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

91

These type containers may be used to ship HAZMAT domestically and internationally when 

covered by a competent authority approval (CAA) or the packaging has successfully passed all 

applicable UN Performance-Oriented Packaging certification tests and is so marked. When the 

authorized packaging configuration has successfully passed the UN Performance-Oriented 

Packaging certification test and the packaging is marked with the applicable certification 

marking, and when military requirements such as detailed drawings specify over-packing of this 

configuration, then the testing and subsequent marking of the outer container are unnecessary.

NOTE: Additional certification information can be found in Title 49 CFR, 

Parts 178.500 through 178.503.

FIGURE 42. Example of UN Performance-Oriented Packaging 

certification marking for a fiberboard box.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

92

5.13.5.3 DOT special permits (SPs). When a DOT-SP is applicable, the DOT-SP 

number (e.g., DOT-SP 7605) shall be placed near the PSN and any other required cautionary 

marking. DOT-SPs shall not apply to international shipments unless the HAZMAT is exempted 

from UN Performance-Oriented Packaging certification marking requirements.

5.13.5.4 Certification of equivalency (COE). When a COE has been issued, the 

container certification number shall be applied near the PSN and any other cautionary marking. 

COEs shall not apply to international shipments, unless the HAZMAT is exempted from UN 

Performance-Oriented Packaging certification marking requirements.

5.13.5.5 Competent authority approval (CAA). The competent authority, which is 

DOT, may grant permission to use a package without the UN Performance-Oriented Packaging

certification tests. If required by the CAA, the approval number shall appear on the package in 

association with the PSN and ID number. All requests for CAAs shall be documented as 

specified in Title 49 CFR and Joint Regulation DLAD 4145.41/AR 700-143/SECNAVINST 

4030.55/AFJI 24-210 (I)/MCO 4030.40.

5.13.5.6 Overpacked and assorted-items pack containers of HAZMAT. When the 

authorized packaging configuration has successfully passed the UN Performance-Oriented 

Packaging certification tests and the packaging is marked with the applicable UN PerformanceOriented Packaging certification marking, and when military requirements specify overpacking 

of the packaging configuration in an outer container (placing a fiberboard box in a wood box), 

then the testing and subsequent marking of the outer container is unnecessary. In addition to the 

required marking, conformance with UN Performance-Oriented Packaging recommendations 

shall be shown by marking the outer container with the word: “OVERPACK”. This marking, 

however, is not sufficient for combination packages consisting of overpacked inner packages

which contain liquids and are transported by military aircraft. For all military air shipments 

containing HAZMAT liquids, the outer container shall be marked “AIR ELIGIBLE” to indicate 

that either the inner receptacles or the outer container meet the internal pressure requirements 

for air eligibility. An assorted-items pack container comprised of performance-tested packagings 

shall also be marked with this information to certify conformance with UN PerformanceOriented Packaging recommendations. When two or more packages of compatible HAZMAT 

are placed within the same outside container or overpack, the outside container or overpack shall 

be labeled as required for each class of HAZMAT contained therein.

5.13.6 Documentation for HAZMAT. The shipper is responsible for the completion of 

a Shipper’s Declaration for Dangerous Goods form for each and every military air shipment 

containing dangerous goods as specified in inter-Service manual AFMAN 24-

204(INTERSERVICE)/TM 38-250/NAVSUP PUB 505/MCO P4030.19J/DLAI 4145.3, which 

provides instructions on how to properly complete the form.

5.13.6.1 Existing palletized unit loads of HAZMAT. Existing palletized unit loads of 

HAZMAT in the DoD stockpile identified as having passed the UN Performance-Oriented 

Packaging certification testing requirements shall have the UN Performance-Oriented Packaging

certification marking applied to placards placed on two opposite sides of the pallet load in lieu of 

marking each container. This rule also applies to material having different DOT and UN PSNs.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

93

5.13.7 Flash point marking (see Figure 43). All unit packs and intermediate and 

exterior shipping containers packed with flammable liquids (flash point of not more than 60 

degrees Celsius (C) or 140 degrees Fahrenheit (F)) shall be marked with the flash point of the 

material. The flash point shall be preceded by the words “FLASH POINT” and shall be 

followed by the letter “C” or “F” as appropriate. The flash point marking may be shown in 

degrees C, F, or both and shall be applied in a conspicuous location on the identification-marked 

side of the container. If space is not available on the identification-marked side, the required 

HAZMAT marking, labeling, and the flash point marking may be placed on the opposite side. 

The size of the lettering shall be proportionate to the available marking space. The flash point 

shall be determined by using the testing methods prescribed in Title 49 CFR.

FIGURE 43. Flash point marking.

5.13.8 Specific hazards.

5.13.8.1 Asbestos (see Figure 44). Containers of asbestos and products containing 

asbestos which may be expected to produce dust in excess of the Occupational Safety and Health 

Administration's (OSHA) exposure limits during handling, processing, storage, disposal, or 

transportation shall be marked with a warning label, as specified in OSHA's Title 29 CFR.

5.13.8.2 Polychlorinated biphenyls (PCB) (see Figure 44). As required by the 

Environmental Protection Agency (see Title 40 CFR), unit packs and intermediate containers, 

including containers that serve as shipping containers of waste PCB, shall have a PCB label 

affixed to them.

5.13.9 Hazardous chemical warning label. Hazardous materials shall require a chemical 

warning label as specified in Title 29 CFR, Part 1910.1200, Hazard Communication Standard. 

When the manufacturer's warning label has been removed or obliterated, or if the product is 

poured from one container into another, the DoD standard hazard warning label (DD Form 2521 

or DD Form 2522 (smaller version)) shall be applied to the unit container. The warning labels 

are available in the CD-ROM version of the Hazardous Materials Information System (HMIS). 

If a container includes more than one unit pack, such as a container of six aerosol cans that have 

a unit issue of “one each”, then the warning label shall not be applied to the individual unit packs 

(each aerosol can) that comprise the container until the container itself is opened.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

94

FIGURE 44. Asbestos and PCB HAZMAT labels.

5.13.10 Kits containing HAZMAT. Kits that contain hazardous components in small 

quantities such as adhesives, solvents, inks, paints, and other flammable liquids, or chemical kits 

as defined by Title 49 CFR, shall be marked and labeled in accordance with the requirements of 

Title 49 CFR and the applicable international document (e.g., ICAO, IMO, etc.). When one or 

more components in a kit are classified as a HAZMAT, the container shall be marked and 

labeled as specified in 5.13.2. The UN Performance-Oriented Packaging certification marking is

not required when the individual kits meet the requirements of Title 49 CFR, Part 173.4, and the 

applicable modal requirements.

5.13.11 Radioactive material marking and labeling requirements. Containers of 

radioactive materials prepared for shipment shall be marked and labeled in accordance with 

applicable sections of Title 49 CFR and the applicable international document (e.g., ICAO 

Technical Instructions, IMDG Code, etc.). The applicable radioactive HAZMAT classification 

warning labels shall be applied on two opposite sides of the shipping container for domestic and 

international shipments. The applied radioactive label shall have the following information 

entered in the blank spaces in accordance with Title 49 CFR:

a. Contents. The name of the radionuclides.

b. Number of becquerels expressed in appropriate becquerel units.

c. Transport index. A dimensionless number (rounded up to the first decimal place) 

which designates a degree of control to be exercised by the carrier during transportation. It 

applies to radioactive materials requiring radioactive II or III labels only.

5.13.11.1 Nuclear Regulatory Commission (NRC) interior/storage container label (see

Figure 45). Containers of radioactive materials in storage shall be labeled in accordance with 

Title 10 CFR (see 5.13.11.4 for exceptions). When a container of radioactive material has been

labeled as specified in Title 49 CFR, the NRC label shall be removed prior to shipment to 

preclude any confusion for personnel transporting or receiving the container. Once the container 

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

95

is received, the proper NRC label shall again be affixed to the container. Exceptions to the use 

of the NRC interior/storage container label are contained in 5.13.11.4. These interior/storage 

container labels may be either locally produced or procured. However, they shall contain all the 

information required for each radioactive material. The NRC labels shall be applied to the 

identification-marked side of the unit pack or intermediate container and shall bear the radiation 

caution symbol and the words “CAUTION: RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL” or the words 

“DANGER: RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL”, as appropriate. They shall also include relevant 

information such as radiation levels, kinds of material, estimate of activity, estimated activity 

date, and mass enrichment. The label size shall be at least 2 by 2 inches (50.8 by 50.8 mm) but 

may be larger to accommodate larger packages.

FIGURE 45. NRC interior/storage container label.

5.13.11.2 Radioactive materials requiring an NRC label. Any commodity or item 

containing radioactive material in excess of the amounts shown in Title 10 CFR, Part 20, 

Appendix C, require an NRC label. Radionuclides other than those listed in Title 10 CFR or 

mixtures of beta emitters of unknown composition also require an NRC label.

5.13.11.3 Transportation of radioactive materials. Shipping containers of radioactive 

material shall be marked and labeled as specified in Title 49 CFR for domestic shipments, 

applicable international documents such as the ICAO or IMO for international shipments, or the 

AFMAN 24-204(INTERSERVICE)/TM 38-250/NAVSUP PUB 505/MCO P4030.19J/DLAI 

4145.3 for military air shipments.

5.13.11.4 Exceptions to the use of radioactive material labels. When determining the 

appropriate radioactive material labels to be applied to containers in storage and to those being 

prepared for shipment, the following exception data shall be considered. The NRC 

interior/storage container label is not required when limited quantities of radioactive materials, 

devices, and low specific activity radioactive devices specified in Title 49 CFR, Part 173; when 

materials are processed in accordance with the general license provision of Title 10 CFR, Parts 

31 and 40; when materials are exempted by the provisions of Title 10 CFR; when alternate 

marking is authorized by the NRC in a specific license; or when materials are otherwise 

exempted by Federal regulations. Any outer package that contains radioactive material need not 

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

96

be labeled in accordance with the provisions in Title 10 CFR, Part 20, if the package is in 

transport or is ready for transport, and the packaging/labeling/marking is in accordance with the 

DOT regulations (i.e., Title 49 CFR, Part 173). Radioactive hazardous warning labels are not 

required for manufacturing or processing equipment such as nuclear reactors, their components, 

piping, and tanks or when packages are exempt from DOT labeling under Title 49 CFR, Parts 

173.421, 173.422, 173.424, or 173.425; when specific exemptions are granted by DOT; and as 

specified in AFMAN 24-204(INTERSERVICE)/TM 38-250/NAVSUP PUB 505/MCO 

P4030.19J/DLAI 4145.3.

5.14 Ammunition and explosives. Ammunition and explosives marking is specified 

herein or is specified by the item packaging drawings or Special Packaging Instructions as 

approved by the cognizant activity (see 5.14.8 order of precedence). General requirements for 

marking, marking materials, and methods are in 4.2, with the exception of 4.2.2. For DD Form 

250 and DD Form 1348-1A requirements see 5.5, 5.11.2, and 5.12.

5.14.1 Identification marking on unit packs, intermediate containers, and unpacked 

items. The following physical identification marking shall be applied in accordance with 4.2.1.2

and 4.2.1.4 on unit packs and intermediate containers (defined as inner packaging in Title 49

CFR) and unpacked items:

a. NSN/NATO stock number. The NSN/NATO stock number shall be marked only 

when applicable, for example when specified in contract drawings.

b. DODIC/NALC. The DODIC/NALC shall be marked if applicable. If an

NSN/NATO stock number is marked, the DODIC/NALC shall follow on the same line if 

possible.

c. Quantity/unit of issue (UI). The quantity always precedes the item description 

(nomenclature) on the same line. The UI is only marked when it is other than each;

abbreviations (e.g. FT, LB, etc.) may be used (see Table I).

NOTE: The quantity printed on the Ammunition/Explosives Packaging Label (see 5.14.5) may 

be identified with an ANSI ASC X12.3 Data Element 355 (Unit or Basis for Measurement)

code, which could be different from the UI abbreviation.

d. Item description (nomenclature). The item description (nomenclature) may be 

marked on more than one line if required due to space limitations.

e. Management control number (MCN) or part/manufacturer (PN/MFR). If a 

DODIC/NALC is not marked and an NSN/NATO stock number is not marked, a locally 

assigned MCN or PN/MFR shall be marked below the item description (nomenclature).

f. Lot number and serial number (when serial number is assigned). The word “LOT” 

shall precede the lot number and “SER” shall precede the serial number.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

97

NOTE: Words such as “NSN/NATO Stock Number”, “Item Description”, and “Quantity” shall 

not be included as part of the identification marking. As applicable, the NSN/NATO stock 

number and DODIC/NALC marking shall be located on one long side of the pack/container/item 

occupying the first line. The quantity, unit of issue (as applicable), and item description 

(nomenclature) shall be marked on the next line. The MCN or part number/manufacturer 

(PN/MFR), as applicable, is then marked on the next line below the item description 

(nomenclature). Marking a transparent bag is not required if all marking on the unit pack(s) or 

intermediate container(s) are legible through the bag. For unpacked separate-loading projectiles 

or unpacked bombs in a unit load, see (5.14.4.1) for the unit load identification marking 

requirements.

5.14.2 Identification marking on unpacked items (not in a unit load) and exterior 

containers (see Figures 46 and 47). The identification marking shall include all the information 

marked on the inner containers or unpacked items and the following additional marking:

a. Weight. The capital letters “WT” shall precede the numerical gross weight in 

pounds. Fractional weights shall be rounded up to the next whole pound. The numerical 

weight shall be followed with the abbreviation for pounds “LBS” in capital letters.

b. Proper shipping name (PSN) and United Nations (UN) HAZMAT identification 

number (or North American (NA) numbers) shall be marked on the package in a clear area 

away from any other box marking. For cylindrical containers, the PSN/UN number shall be 

marked lengthwise on the container and separated from all other marking. The PSN/UN 

number shall be as shown in the Joint Hazard Classification System (JHCS) for the specific 

NSN being packaged or as assigned by a proper classification authority. It shall be noted that 

NA numbers are not authorized for international shipments. For both domestic and 

international shipments, PSNs for n.o.s. items shall be followed by a technical name in 

parentheses. The PSN is required even though it may be identical to the item description

(nomenclature).

c. Special precautionary marking. Special precautionary marking and required 

HAZMAT labels for the commodity described by the PSN shall be applied in accordance with 

Title 49 CFR.

d. Lot number and serial number (marked on side of container). The lower-most 

marking on the package side containing the item description (nomenclature) shall be the 

ammunition lot number. The lot number shall be preceded by the word “LOT” and shall be 

underlined with a solid line approximately 0.13 inch (3.18 mm) thick. If a serial number is 

required for the item(s), the word “SER” and the specific number(s) shall be marked above the 

lot number.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

98

FIGURE 46. Identification marking and the placement of ammo/explosives 

identification bar code labels on exterior rectangular containers.

FIGURE 47. Identification marking and the placement of ammo/explosives 

identification bar code labels for exterior cylindrical containers.

CARTRIDGES FOR WEAPONS, INERT

PROJECTILE UN0328

1315-00-028-4849-C123

1–CARTRIDGE 120MM TP–T M800

LOT 1A-394B018-037 WT 75 LBS

C123

1A-394B018-037 Inside the cover rim

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

99

e. UN Performance-Oriented Packaging certification marking. The appropriate UN 

Performance-Oriented Packaging symbol as specified by the cognizant design activity in the 

contract or on the drawing shall be marked on the side of the container that is opposite the 

identification-marked side for both rectangular and cylindrical containers. If the exterior 

container is an overpack containing UN Performance-Oriented Packaging certification marked 

and certified inner containers, the following marking shall be placed on the container in lieu of 

the UN Performance-Oriented Packaging certification marking: “OVERPACK”. This marking, 

however, is not sufficient for combination packages consisting of overpacked inner packaging

which contain liquids and are transported by military aircraft. For military air shipments of 

applicable HAZMAT liquids, the outer container shall be marked with the words “AIR 

ELIGIBLE” to indicate that either the inner receptacles or the outer container meet internal 

pressure requirements for air eligibility. Any other special precautionary marking and 

HAZMAT labels required by the appropriate regulation for the commodity described by the 

PSN shall be applied (see 5.13).

f. DODIC/NALC and lot number (marked on ends of container or container rims). Both 

ends of rectangular containers shall be marked with the DODIC/NALC of the item being packed 

and the appropriate lot number. The lot number on the box ends shall not be preceded by the 

word “LOT” or underlined. The DODIC/NALC shall be marked on the inside rim of the cover 

end of cylindrical containers. The lot number shall not be preceded by the word “LOT”. 

g. Nose end marking is required for rocket ammunition and white phosphorus “WP” 

smoke artillery ammunition. The rocket nose or artillery fuze end of the container shall be 

identified with the marking “NOSE END”. For rectangular boxes, the end or edge of the box 

top shall be marked “NOSE END” to indicate the ammunition position. Marking may be 

placed on either end of the box to coincide with ammunition position.

h. DOT special permit (SP) numbers. If a DOT-SP number is assigned to a packaged 

item, it shall be plainly and durably marked “DOT-SP” followed by the specific exemption 

number assigned. Unless otherwise specified, rectangular containers shall have the “DOT-SP” 

marking on a separate line from the PSN/ID number marking.

i. Special marking. Other special marking that is required to be marked on the package 

shall be provided for in the contract or by detailed drawings. Examples include special 

orientation, temperature limit, NATO standardization, net explosive weight (NEW) for air 

shipments, and center of balance marking. Unless otherwise specified, the marking shall be 

placed in a conspicuous location on the identification marked side of the package where they 

shall not interfere with other marking.

j. Class 1 (explosives) materials owned by DoD and packaged prior to January 1, 1990 

shall be declared “Government-owned dangerous goods packaged prior to January 1, 1990” on 

the shipping papers and need not be re-marked.

5.14.3 Identification marking on empty containers. Containers inspected and certified 

as empty that are shipped to contractors or depots shall be marked with the word “EMPTY”. 

The old munitions item identification and DOT marking shall be completely obliterated, unless 

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

100

the containers are being retained for reuse. Care should be taken not to obliterate the container 

marking; i.e., container NSN, part number, or nomenclature. The word “EMPTY” shall be 

stenciled or printed on the upper half of the container on the same side that had the old 

identification of contents listed. A decal (EMPTY) may be used if space is available but not on 

reusable containers since the adhesive is difficult to remove. The container NSN and 

nomenclature shall be applied, if not already present. Each container shall contain a certificate 

of clearance. The condition code shall be annotated on turn-in/shipping documents and the 

appropriate DD Form 1500 series tags/labels (see 5.10.21) shall be attached to the outside of 

containers that are in other than condition code A. Due to sheer volume and cost effectiveness, 

empty containers destined for a DLA Disposition Services Office, specifically designated and 

designed for containment of small arms ammunition (50 Cal and below), are not subject to the 

obliteration requirement, but are subject to written certification on the disposal turn-in document 

that they are empty and free of explosive/energetic material.

5.14.4 Identification marking on unit loads, to include palletized unit loads (see Figure 

48). The identification marking on unit loads of ammunition shall include the following and be 

applied as follows:

FIGURE 48. Examples of ammo/explosives unit load identification 

and identification bar code marking.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

101

5.14.4.1 Content of unit load identification marking.

a. NSN.

b. DODIC/NALC.

c. Lot number.

d. Quantity.

(1) By lot (if more than one lot).

(2) Total quantity (if one lot).

e. Item description.

f. Gross weight.

g. PSN and UN HAZMAT identification number.

h. UN Performance-Oriented Packaging certification marking.

5.14.4.2 Application of unit load identification marking.

a. Unit loads.

(1) Unit loads require all identification marking as specified in 5.14.4.1 be 

visible on the exposed face of one or more boxes (see Figures 46/47) or on 

the waterproof marking board described in (5) below.

(2) When a unit load is configured in such a way that the PSN and UN 

HAZMAT identification number are not visible, the top layer shall be 

turned to expose the PSN and identification number. When it is not 

practical to turn the entire top layer, two diagonal corner boxes on the top 

layer shall be turned to expose the PSN and identification number.

(3) Boxes which shall have all nose ends pointed in the same direction such as 

rockets and white phosphorus (WP) rounds shall not be turned.

(4) UN Performance-Oriented Packaging certification marking shall also be 

exposed on at least one place on the unit load.

(5) Unit loads require additional identification marking that may not be visible 

on exposed boxes. This additional marking is normally limited to quantity 

and partial nomenclature such as 100 grenades or 30 cartridges, gross 

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

102

weight of the unit load, applicable mixed lot identification, and any empty / 

light (lite) box data (quantity per box or number of empty boxes). Unless 

otherwise specified, unit loads may have one or more boxes turned to 

present a blank surface for marking additional information. Marking shall 

be applied as prescribed in section 5 herein and shall be on the largest 

practical lettering. Waterproof marking boards may be used when it is 

impossible to obtain a blank surface for marking. Approval shall be 

obtained by the procuring command prior to using marking boards. For unit 

loads 10 cubic feet and over, additional identification marking shall be 

placed on the end of the load adjacent to the identification marked side.

(6) Unitized or palletized break bulk shipments by cargo ship under charter to 

DoD may be shipped with a single label per unit load. However, when the 

logistics flow of material is unknown, general labeling requirements shall be 

met.

(7) All OCONUS shipments (except those in intermodal containers) require that 

at least one hazard warning label be affixed to each unit load of palletized 

cargo or to each exterior package of loose cargo in accordance with Title 49 

CFR and the applicable international modal document requirements.

(8) The marking and labeling requirements imposed by foreign governments 

shall be observed as prescribed by the Service directing the shipment.

b. Unit loads of unpackaged ammunition.

(1) Unit loads of otherwise unpackaged ammunition, such as separate loading 

projectiles, require the addition of only the identification marking that is not 

visible on the projectiles. Any additional marking is normally limited to 

quantity, nomenclature, gross weight, and mixed lot identification, including 

quantity per lot. Marking may be applied directly to the load by stenciling, 

embossing, stamping, or machine printing. Tags may be used when the 

marking cannot be applied directly to the pallet load.

(2) The location and content of identification marking shall be specified on the 

ammunition packaging and marking drawings for separate loading 

projectiles.

c. Unit loads of cylindrical containers.

(1) Unit loads of cylindrical metal containers with identification marking such 

as propelling charges, complete rounds, etc., shall have additional marking

applied diagonally at opposite ends of the upper layer of the load by 

waterproof tag (see 4.2.3), label (see 4.2.2) or stamping in a contrasting 

color (see 4.2.1.4).

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

103

(2) Unit load identification marking shall include gross weight, quantity, mixed 

lot, and empty/light container identification.

(3) Containers shall be positioned so that the PSN and UN HAZMAT 

identification number are visible on at least one container on one side of the 

unit load. The orientation of the containers specified in the unitized drawing

shall be followed.

d. Unit loads comprised of multiple lots.

(1) Unit loads of ammunition and explosives comprised of more than one lot 

shall be marked with the appropriate lot numbers.

(2) The lot number and quantity of each lot in unit loads of mixed lots shall be 

listed on a plain white label or tag, as applicable, and shall be placed 

adjacent to other identification marking. The maximum size of the label or 

tag shall be a minimum of 4 by 4 inches (10.2 by 10.2 cm) and the lettering 

shall be not less than 0.25 inch (6.35 mm) in height.

e. Full carload or full truckload shipments. Packages of military ammunition and 

explosives shipped by or on behalf of DoD in freight container loads, carloads, or truckloads 

(including exclusive use) which are loaded and unloaded by the shipper or by DoD, are exempt 

from labeling requirements.

f. Empty / light (lite) box / light (lite) load marking. When a package contains less 

ammunition or explosives than the package is designed to contain or when an empty package is 

used to square a unit load, the box shall be specifically marked as follows:

(1) An empty / light (lite) box / light (lite) load, if applicable, shall be identified 

as such by marking or stenciling the words “EMPTY” or “LIGHT BOX”

(“LITE BOX”) in a contrasting orange paint scheme, on the identification 

side, space permitting, in the largest practical size letters. An additional 

marking or stenciling shall be placed on the top, side, and end of the 

container.

(2) Unitized loads. When the bottom, sides or end surfaces of an empty or light 

(lite) box is visible within a unit load, then these surfaces shall also be 

marked or stenciled with the words “EMPTY” or “LIGHT BOX” (“LITE 

BOX”) in a contrasting orange paint scheme, in the largest practical size 

letters. In addition, a unit load containing empty or light (lite) boxes shall 

be identified by quantity per box and/or number of empty boxes, on the 

pallet identification marking side.

(3) Cylindrical containers. An empty / light (lite) box / light (lite) load of 

cylinders shall be identified as such by marking or stenciling the words 

“EMPTY” or “LIGHT BOX” (“LITE BOX”) in a contrasting orange paint 

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

104

scheme on the bottom, opposite sides, and the cover or cover latch of the 

cylinder.

(4) In a general shipping situation, there is only one light (lite) box per lot, per 

condition code, per structure. However, additional light (lite) boxes may be 

required for items issued to custody accounts. Light (lite) box marking is

not required for ammunition disposition request (ADR) munitions or 

munitions in ready explosive facilities. Nonstandard munitions boxes do 

not require light (lite) box marking.

(5) Marking applied to containers need not be re-accomplished to correct 

deficiencies in size, location, or space unless required for shipment.

NOTE: At the Services' discretion, an empty / light (lite) box / light (lite) load box may be 

identified as such by painting the entire box in a contrasting orange paint scheme. Moreover, 

regardless of container size (cube) and the Services' preferred method, the contrasting orange 

paint scheme is readily identifiable to an empty / light (lite) box / light (lite) load.

5.14.5 Ammunition/Explosives Packaging Label marking requirements. The 

application of an Ammunition/Explosives Packaging Label with 2D (PDF417) bar code and

human-readable text is required for identification marking on ammunition and explosives

containers and unit loads. Use of the 2D (PDF417) bar code with human-readable information is 

mandatory. In addition to all other marking, every exterior container and unit load shall have 

Ammunition/Explosives Packaging Labels or marking applied (see Figures 46, 47 and 48).

a. The Ammunition/Explosives Packaging Label is designed to support standard DoD 

munitions business processes while providing support to implement data automation across all 

Services. This is accomplished by marking the mandatory identification data elements, while 

allowing for additional optional data elements to support unique Service requirements. These 

data elements are encoded in a 2D (PDF417) bar code following the procedures in Table A-V 

Ammunition/Explosives Packaging Label 2D (PDF417) format. All mandatory data elements if 

available are encoded and printed on the label in a human-readable form to reduce additional 

marking requirements (see Figures 46, 47, and 48).

b. The use of the Ammunition/Explosives Packaging Label is mandatory for all new 

procurement of ammunition and explosives stocks.

c. Re-marking of all legacy stocks is not mandatory; however, they should be marked as 

the need to re-mark the stock occurs. Until all legacy stocks are marked, legacy assets that enter 

the transportation system shall be marked once the Service has the capability to generate the 

Ammunition/Explosives Packaging Label.

5.14.5.1 Label specifications. Labels shall meet the requirements for grade A, style 2, 

composition (b) labels as specified in MIL-PRF-61002. The performance requirements for 

solvent and detergent resistance are not required. The label should be the pressure sensitive 

adhesive type. Additional performance requirements that shall be met are as follows:

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

105

a. The label material shall provide a minimum of 42 lbs/1 inch width tensile strength at 

break when tested in accordance with ASTM D882. Material shall provide a minimum of 6600 

grams (66 Newtons) of puncture – propagation tear resistance when tested in accordance with

ASTM D2582.

b. Each label shall be no greater than 4 by 4 inches (10.2 by 10.2 cm) square (see Figure 

49). The size of the labels may be commensurate with the quantity of encoded data and the 

human-readable information. Format is mandated and grouped by NSN or part number and 

then by serial number for each lot number, if applicable. Figure 51 shows an example of a label 

set.

NOTE: The encoded data in the 2D (PDF417) bar code is as 

follows with the non-printable ASCII characters represented 

by RS, 

GS, and EOT (also see Appendix A):

[)>RS06GS20SPL100921052308905611GS2Q2000GS3QLBGS18Q10CFGSN1325012147311GS4RG119GS7Q8EA

GS6WFUZE SET, BOMB FMU-139A/BGS10PDUN0409GS1TMGG87G001Y010GS7Q6EAGS1TMGG88

D003Y002GS7Q2EAGSN1325014445122GS4REA69GS7Q4EAGS6WKMU-556/B (JDAM)GS10PDUN0000GS

1TMDS99K105-001GS7Q4EAGSS158741GSS158941GSS158985GSS158990RS

EOT

FIGURE 49. Ammunition/Explosives Packaging Label.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

106

5.14.6 Ammunition/Explosives Packaging Label 2D (PDF417) bar code data sets. 

Repeating data sets are used in order to minimize the amount of data contained in the bar code, 

and an implicit nesting structure is established within the bar code data (see Figure 50). It 

contains three levels of information: generic data that is relevant to the entire package level 

entity, a set of data for each stock numbered or part numbered asset, and lot number and/or serial 

number level information. Each level provides further classification of the ammunition and 

explosives contained in the packaging level. See hierarchy level description below for proper 

use.

Package level data – for material managed by lot number

 Stock item data

 Lot level data

Package level data – for material managed by lot number and serial number

 Stock item data

 Lot level data

 Serial number data

Package level data – for material managed by serial number only

Stock item data

 Serial number data

FIGURE 50. Data nesting structure.

5.14.6.1 Ammunition/Explosives Packaging Label bar code data structure. The 

identification bar code and the accompanying human-readable information shall be formatted 

and printed as noted in the following paragraphs and Appendix A of this standard, with reference 

to ANSI MH10.8.2 and ISO/IEC 15434. Data structure requirements are noted in Table A-V.

a. Package level data. Package level generic information is encoded in the 

identification bar code.

(1) Label traceability code. The label traceability code is a 20-character unique 

element for each package label and is identified with the ANSI MH10.8.2 

data identifier of ‘20S’. The label traceability code is alphanumeric 

characters with no special characters allowed. The label traceability code is 

used to identify a specific package to prevent duplicate scanning of the same 

package during receipt, inventory, internal location change, and shipping

operations. While the label traceability code may be unique within a 

Service’s automated information system (AIS), the label serial number is 

not considered unique within a Joint environment, as the Service AISs are 

not dynamically linked.

(2) Package weight. The package weight is a data element used to document 

the total gross weight of the assets and all inner and outer packing for a 

given package level and is identified with the ANSI MH10.8.2 data 

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

107

identifier of ‘2Q’. Package weight is expressed as a number of one to nine 

characters, allows the use of a decimal point, and is assumed to be pounds

unless qualified by a different unit of measure (see Table A-V Notes 1 and 

3). If the weight is documented with a unit for measurement other than 

pounds, then a “package weight units” data element is used to identify the 

unit for measurement, which is identified with the ANSI MH10.8.2 data 

identifier of ‘3Q’.

(3) Package cube. The package cube is the total cube (volume) of the package

and is identified with the ANSI MH10.8.2 data identifier of ‘18Q’.

(4) Optional data elements. Enter the applicable data elements that pertain to 

the entire package. See Table A-V for the listing of optional elements.

b. Stock item level data. The stock item level data provides information that classifies 

the ammunition or explosives by characteristics for the purpose of supply chain management. 

The primary method of classification is by the assigned NSN or PN if an NSN is not assigned. 

The stock item level data set may be repeated within the packaging level data set. See 

Appendix A and Table A-V for an explanation of data identifiers and 2D (PDF417) bar code 

encoding requirements. The following elements are included within this data level.

(1) National stock number. The national stock number identifies the material in 

the package if an NSN has been assigned. It is identified with the ANSI

MH10.8.2 data identifier of ‘N’. If an NSN is not assigned, the material is 

tracked by PN. The following business rules apply:

(2) Part number. The PN assigned by the manufacture identifies the material 

and is identified with the ANSI MH10.8.2 data identifier of ‘1P’. The PN 

shall only be encoded when the NSN is not assigned.

(3) Department of Defense identification code (DODIC). The DoD

identification code is a four-digit code that identifies ammunition and 

explosives items within a supply system and is identified with the ANSI

MH10.8.2 data identifier of ‘4R’.

(4) Hazardous material code. The hazardous material code is used to identify 

the specific type of hazardous material being transported and handled. It is 

identified with the ANSI MH10.8.2 data identifier of ‘10P’.

(5) Nomenclature. The nomenclature assigned by the Federal Logistics 

Information System provides the proper noun description of the assets and is 

identified with the ANSI MH10.8.2 data identifier of ‘6W’. When the 

security classification of an item prevents the marking of the nomenclature 

during transportation, that guidance takes precedence over this standard.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

108

(6) Quantity (unit of measure). The quantity (unit of measure) identifies the 

units/amounts of materiel or number of items in a package and is identified 

with the ANSI MH10.8.2 data identifier of ‘7Q’. The DoD 4100.39, Vol 

10, Table 81, Unit of Measure Designation code or ANSI ASC X12.3 Data 

Element 355 (Unit or Basis for Measurement) code shall be printed as 

human-readable information on the labels. Each Service’s AIS shall

provide for quantity conversions, if required, for unit of issue codes, unit of 

measure codes, and X12.3 Data Element 355 codes.

(7) Optional data elements. Enter the applicable data elements that pertain to 

the stock item level. See Table A-V for the listing of optional elements.

c. Lot number and/or serial number level data. The lot number and serial number level 

provides information that identifies product life cycle information associated with the 

ammunition or explosives NSN or PN. The lot number and serial number level data set may be 

repeated within the stock level data set. See Appendix A and Table A-V for an explanation of 

data identifiers and 2D (PDF417) bar code encoding requirements. The following elements are 

included within this data set.

(1) Lot number. The lot number identifies the production batch of the materiel 

in a package and is identified with the ANSI MH10.8.2 data identifier of 

‘1T’. Material tracked by lot numbers may also have serial numbers 

assigned; in this case the serial numbers would be shown within the lot 

number data set. See Figure 51 example.

(a) Quantity (unit of measure). The quantity identifies the units/amounts 

of materiel or number of lot numbered items in a package and is 

identified with the ANSI MHI MH10.8.2 data identifier of ‘7Q’. The 

DoD 4100.39, Vol 10, Table 81, Unit of Measure Designation code 

or ANSI ASC X12.3 Data Element 355 (Unit or Basis for 

Measurement) code shall be printed as human-readable information 

on the labels. Each Service’s AIS shall provide for quantity 

conversions, if required, for unit of issue codes, unit of measure 

codes, and X12.3 Data Element 355 codes.

(b) Serial number(s). The serial number and/or UII, as applicable, 

uniquely identifies ammunition or explosives within a lot number and 

is identified with the ANSI MH10.8.2 data identifier of ‘S’and/or 

‘25S’ respectively. See Figure 51 example.

(c) Optional data elements. Enter the applicable data elements following 

the respective lot number or a serial numbered item. See Table A-V

for the listing of optional elements.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

109

(2) Serial number(s). When material is not tracked by lot number(s), but is 

tracked by serial number and/or UII, as applicable , this data set shall be 

used. See Figure 51 example.

(a) The serial number uniquely identifies ammunition or explosives 

within an NSN or PN and is identified with the ANSI MH10.8.2 data 

identifier of ‘S’.

(b) Optional data elements. See Table A-V for the listing of optional 

elements.

5.14.6.2 Identification bar code human-readable information. Human-readable 

information shall be printed in close proximity to the 2D (PDF417) bar code. Mandatory data 

elements shall be encoded in the 2D (PDF417) bar code and printed on the label as human 

translations of the encoded data if the element is applicable to the item or package mark. The 

DoD 4100.39, Vol 10, Table 81, Unit of Measure Designation code or ANSI ASC X12.3 Data 

Element 355 (Unit or Basis for Measurement) code shall be printed as human-readable 

information on the labels. Each Service’s AIS shall provide for quantity conversions, if required, 

for unit of issue codes, unit of measure codes, and X12.3 Data Element 355 codes.

a. All encoded data elements shall be printed as human-readable information.

(1) The printed human-readable information data shall be a translation of the 

data encoded in the 2D (PDF417) bar code and shall not include encoded 

data identifiers or element separators. The 2D (PDF417) bar code humanreadable information for each data element, except for the label traceability 

code, shall be preceded by a representative data field title. The encoded 

ANSI ASC X12.3 Data Element 355 (Unit or Basis for Measurement) code 

suffix for quantity, cube, and weight should be translated for clarity.

(2) The last two characters of the label traceability code shall be translated and 

printed on each label to show the relationship, e.g., 1 of 2, 2 of 2 within a 

series of labels for a package. A label series may consist of nine labels used 

to identify the contents of the labeled package.

b. The human-readable information shall be printed outside the quiet zone of the 2D 

(PDF417) bar code. The human-readable information text shall be no smaller than 10 lines per 

1 inch (25.4 mm) (approximately a 7-point font).

5.14.6.3 Use of multiple Ammunition/Explosives Packaging Labels for large data 

requirements (see Figure 51). If a 2D (PDF417) bar code and its printed human-readable 

information contain more information than can be printed on one label, additional 2D (PDF417) 

bar code labels shall be affixed next to each other to show the additional information. Each label 

in the set shall have a unique label serial number and shall be marked consecutively as “1 of X”, 

“2 of X”, “3 of X”, etc. where X is the total number of labels in the set. The first 18 characters 

and the 20th character of the traceability code may also be identical. The information for an 

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

110

NSN, PN, or lot number data set may span across multiple labels. Extra large 2D (PDF417) bar 

codes shall not be used for this purpose.

NOTE: Legacy ammo/explosives labels also allowed NSN, PN, or lot number data to span across 

multiple labels; however, each label in the label series was required to show the common data 

and to also show the item total for each label in the series. The revised Ammunition/Explosives 

Packaging Label does not require spanned common elements on each label, except for the 

traceability code, and does not require an item total for each label in the set. Applications shall 

be able to handle either situation when reading the 2D (PDF417) bar code.

5.14.6.4 Location and application of the Ammunition/Explosives Packaging Label.

a. The Ammunition/Explosives Packaging Label shall be placed in the upper left 

quadrant of the side having the greatest overall, usable marking surface, as applicable, 

containing the identification marking as shown in Figure 46. If there is insufficient space on the

upper left quadrant, the label shall be placed in the most convenient place on the marked side of 

the container. A pressure sensitive label shall be affixed to wood containers by stapling both 

ends of the label to the wood, if required to prevent loss. Any commercial-type staple may be 

used as long as it is not placed within the 2D (PDF417) bar code or within the quiet zone of the 

2D (PDF417) bar code. On other than wood surfaces, the label shall be affixed only after the 

surface to be labeled is clean and dry. On wire-bound boxes, the label shall be affixed so that it 

is at least 0.25 inch (6.35 mm) from all wires and staples.

NOTE: Actual size is 3 by 3 inches (7.6 by 7.6 cm).

FIGURE 51. Examples of multiple Ammunition/Explosives Packaging Labels.

b. The cylindrical container Ammunition/Explosives Packaging Label shall be applied 

immediately to the left of the identification marking and shall always be placed on a relatively 

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

111

flat surface along the container length as shown in Figure 47. Surfaces to be labeled shall be 

clean and dry before the label is affixed.

c. For shipping containers over 10 cubic feet and all unit loads, to include palletized 

unit loads, the Ammunition/Explosives Packaging Label shall be applied on the upper left 

quadrant of the side having the greatest overall usable marking surface and on the upper right 

quadrant end surface to the left of the identification marked side, unless otherwise directed in 

specific technical drawings. (See Figure 48).

5.14.7 Address marking (see Figure 2A). Address marking shall be accomplished and 

applied as specified in 5.2.

5.14.8 Order of precedence. In the event of a conflict between the ammunition and 

explosives marking requirements of this standard and the requirements of product specifications, 

item technical publications, or drawings, the order of precedence shall be:

a. The requirements of the drawings.

b. The requirements of item technical publications.

c. The requirements of product specifications.

d. The requirements of this standard.

6. NOTES

(This section contains information of a general or explanatory nature that may be helpful, but is 

not mandatory).

6.1 Intended use. This standard practice is intended for use when guidance is required 

for the application of military marking as prescribed herein or in contractual documents. The 

marking shown herein may be applied either by vendors or by Government activities.

6.2 Subject term (key word) listing.

Address

Bags

Bar code

Boxes

Code 39

Crates

Drums

Exterior container

Federal Supply Class

Identification

Intermediate container

Labels

National stock number

PDF417

Sacks

SEAVAN

Shipping

Tags

Unit pack

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

112

6.3 International standardization agreement implementation. This standard implements 

STANAG 4281, STANAG 2233, STANAG 4329, QSTAG 1152, and QSTAG 1154. When 

changes to, revision, or cancellation of this standard are proposed, the preparing activity must

coordinate the action with the U.S. National Point of Contact for the international standardization 

agreement, as identified in the ASSIST database at https://assist.dla.mil.

6.4 Sizes of forms used. Descriptions of certain forms cited for use by this standard 

contain specific size requirements. These forms are generally intended to be imprinted with data 

by computers or generated entirely by computers. The sizes listed are those that are compatible 

with the majority of printers associated with computer systems commonly used.

6.5 Unit pack desiccant label. The Method 50 label or package marking described in 

5.10.10 is used to identify packages containing desiccant, a drying agent. The label is intended 

to alert personnel that the package will remain unopened to prevent the degradation of 

preservation of the item. The color red is used to make this marking stand out from other 

marking, which is usually black.

6.6 Chemical agent resistant coatings (CARC). Certain military equipment is required to 

be painted with material that resists contamination by certain chemical agents that may be used 

by the enemy in wartime situations. Since no commercial equivalents are available for these 

compounds, and since there is no commercial need for such protection, use of specific military 

materials is required.

6.7 Changes from previous issue. Marginal notations are not used in this revision to 

identify changes with respect to the previous issue due to the extent of the changes.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

113

TABLE IV. Shelf-life codes.

Required Number of

Months/Quarters Remaining

Upon Receipt by the first

Government activity

Shelf-Life Period Type I Type II Months Quarters

Non-Deteriorative

No Shelf Life Applies

0

zero

0

zero

N/A N/A

01 Month A N/A 25 days N/A

02 Months B N/A 50 days N/A

03 Months C 1 75 days N/A

04 Months D N/A 3 1

05 Months E N/A 4 1

06 Months F 2 5 2

09 Months G 3 8 3

12 Months (1.00-Year) H 4 10 3

15 Months (1.25-Years) J N/A 13 4

18 Months (1.50-Years) K 5 15 5

21 Months (1.75-Years) L N/A 18 6

24 Months (2.00-Years) M 6 21 7

27 Months (2.25-Years) N N/A 23 8

30 Months (2.50-Years) P N/A 26 9

36 Months (3.00-Years) Q 7 31 10

48 Months (4.00-Years) R 8 41 14

60 Months (5.00-Years) S 9 51 17

72 Months (6.00-Years) I N/A 61 20

84 Months (7.00-Years) T N/A 71 24

96 Months (8.00-Years) U N/A 82 27

Variable such as:

90, 132, 216, 228, etc.

Months or any other

number of months not

specifically assigned.

V N/A 77, 113, 184,

194, etc.

26, 38, 61,

65, etc.

120 Months (10-Years) W N/A 102 34

180 Months (15-Years) Y N/A 153 51

240 Months (20-Years) Z N/A 204 68

Shelf-Life Period Greater

than 60 Months for Type II

Extendible Items.

N/A X

85 percent of 

number of 

months

85 percent of 

number of 

months

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

114

APPENDIX A

 TECHNICAL DETAILS FOR 2D (PDF417) BAR CODE

A.1. SCOPE

A.1.1 Scope. Appendix A provides detailed printing instructions for the 2D (PDF417) 

bar code and it provides explanations for the tables that follow. This Appendix is a mandatory 

part of the standard. The information contained herein is intended for compliance.

A.2. PROCEDURE

A.2.1 Printing instructions.

a. The 2D (PDF417) bar code used for shipping and receiving shall be printed with no 

more than 12 data columns in width. The use of 13 to 18 data columns is allowed for inventory 

or supporting documentation applications (identification marking, ammunition/explosives

marking, packing list, etc) if a smaller 2D (PDF417) bar code cannot accommodate the increased 

data requirements. A 2D (PDF417) bar code includes a start pattern, a left row indicator column, 

one or more data columns, a right row indicator column, and a stop pattern. See Figure A-1.

b. The 2D (PDF417) bar code shall not exceed 2.4 inches (61 mm) in height to include 

the surrounding minimum quiet zone.

c. The 2D (PDF417) bar code shall have a minimum quiet zone of 0.04 inch (1.0 mm) 

above, below, to the left, and to the right.

FIGURE A-1. 2D (PDF417) data columns.

d. The minimum narrow element dimension (X-dimension) shall not be less than 0.010

inch (10 mils or 0.254 mm). For 2D (PDF417) bar codes up to 12 data columns, the Xdimension shall not exceed 0.017 inch (17 mils or 0.432 mm). For 13 to 18 data columns, the Xdimension shall not exceed 0.010 inch (10 mils or 0.254 mm).

e. The 2D (PDF417) bar code shall have a minimum row height of three times the width 

of the narrow element (X-dimension).

Start 

Pattern

Stop 

Pattern

Left Row 

Indicator 

Column

Data 

Columns

Right Row 

Indicator 

Column

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

APPENDIX A

115

f. The 2D (PDF417) bar code shall use error correction level 5.

g. The start and stop pattern bars of the 2D (PDF417) bar code shall be perpendicular to 

the natural bottom of the label.

h. The label should be designed so that two bar codes are not next to each other in the 

same horizontal plane unless the label is wide enough to reduce the possibility of interference 

with successful bar code scanning.

i. Data identifiers which contain no information should not be printed.

j. The quality of the printed bar code shall meet a grade requirement of 2.5 (B) at the 

point of production when measured in accordance with ISO/IEC 15438 with a measurement 

aperture of 0.010 inch (10 mils or 0.25 mm) and an inspection wavelength of 660 ± 10 nm.

k. Macro PDF417 bar codes shall be used when the encoded data message file exceeds 

the capacity of a single PDF417 bar code on a label. A full size (18 data column) PDF417 or 

Macro PDF417 bar code can encode approximately 1100 characters at error level 5. The 

character capacity of the bar code is based on a limit of 925 codewords, the compaction 

algorithm used to encode the data in a codeword, and the bar code’s error correction level.

NOTE: The Ammunition/Explosives Packaging Label(s) shall not use Macro PDF417 bar codes.

(1) Macro PDF417 bar codes shall be encoded and printed in accordance with 

ISO/IEC 15438, which also provides a technical explanation for the bar 

code control block information that facilitates reassembly of an encoded 

message after all the applicable bar codes have been scanned at least once in 

any sequence.

(2) Each Macro PDF417 bar code represents a segment of the whole data file 

that is identified within the bar code control block with a file ID assigned by 

the user or system. To reconstruct the whole file, the file segment encoded 

in each bar code is placed in the correct order based on an encoded segment 

number (n of x). There is no requirement for the file ID to be globally 

unique. However, if multiple bar code sets could be present for a scanning 

event, the file ID shall be unique within the context of the event.

(3) Each receiving system used to scan Macro PDF417 bar codes will need to 

determine if the system scanner will operate in a buffered or unbuffered 

mode. As the Macro PDF417 bar codes are scanned, the de-packetizing 

function reconstructs the original message from segments with the same file 

ID. If operating in buffered mode, the bar code codeword de-packetizing 

function is in the scanner’s decoder; if operating in unbuffered mode, the 

de-packetizing function is in the receiving system decoder.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

APPENDIX A

116

(4) To accommodate potentially unbuffered operations by some receiving 

systems, a segment count field in the control block shall be encoded in each 

Macro PDF417 bar code to facilitate checking that all segments in a set of 

Macro PDF417 bar codes are received. The segment count field identifies 

the total number of Macro PDF417 bar codes in the distributed file.

(5) Decoders should provide a decoder-specific means whereby the processing 

of a file ID segment set may be aborted, thus allowing the decoder to begin 

processing a different set of Macro PDF417 bar codes. This is necessary to 

prevent a deadlock condition should one or more bar codes of a given file 

ID be missing or undecodable.

(6) The following is provided to describe the Macro PDF417 control block used 

for the bar code in Figure 20. The codewords are encoded by software 

suites using different schemes; thus, the example only shows the numeric 

value of each codeword and not the actual syntax of how it is encoded by 

the software.

(a) Figure 20 control block codewords within the first (top) bar code’s 

segment data structure are:

(928) (111)(100) (129) (923)(001) (111)(002)

(b) Figure 20 second (bottom) bar code control block codewords are:

(928) (111)(101) (129) (923)(001) (111)(002) (922)

(c) The codewords represent the following controls:

(928) = tag identifier for the start of a macro control block

(111)(100) = modular math base 900 for the 1st segment (00000)

(111)(101) = modular base 900 for the 2nd segment (00001)

(129) = file ID assigned by the user for the set of macro bar codes

(923)(001) = tag and field designator for the segment count field

(111)(002) = modular base 900 for the segment count (00002)

(922) = the tag identifier for the end of the last macro control block

A.2.2 Table A-I information. Table A-I provides data descriptions, format, and data 

sources for the ANSI MH10.8.2 data identifiers (DI) used in the 2D (PDF417) bar code and for 

the data element identifiers (DEI) that identify DoD unique data elements from the DTR.

a. Format 06 DIs (Column 1), as explained in ANSI MH10.8.2, and the Format 07 DEIs 

(Column 1), as defined by DoD in Table A-1, contain specified characters that define the 

general category and intended use of the data that follows. See the USTRANSCOM web site, 

http://www.transcom.mil/ait/ (Library > Standards and Formats), for the most current list of 

DoD applicable data qualifiers (DIs and DEIs).

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

APPENDIX A

117

b. DoD usage (Column 2) displays the titles and usage adopted by DoD for the 

respective DIs/DEIs.

c. Data sources (Column 3) shows the most common source for the 2D (PDF417) bar 

code data. If a DI or DEI is used to encode data for multiple applications, multiple data sources 

may be described.

A.2.3 Tables A-II through A-V information. Tables A-II through A-V provide the 

content of the data streams for generic military shipping labels (MSL), unit move MSLs, unit 

pack ID and container ID 2D (PDF417) bar codes, and ammunition and/or explosives

identification marking 2D (PDF417) bar codes, respectively.

a. Compliance indicator (Column 1) shows the special formatting characters associated 

with the ISO/IEC 15434 data format. The compliance indicator shall be the first three 

characters in the message header. The compliance indicator shall be [)> (left bracket, right 

parenthesis, and greater than).

b. Element separators (Column 2) show the separator or terminal code that is for that 

particular part of the data stream. The format trailer character (RS) shall be used at the end of 

the message header (before a format series) and at the end of each format series of data (before 

the next series of data). The data element separator (GS) separates data elements within each 

format series of the data table. The message trailer (EOT) identifies the end of the message 

within the data stream. See ISO/IEC 15434. These are non-printable, single, ASCII control

characters that cannot be typed as simple text into the bar code – the control characters must be 

entered as per the encoding software’s specifications.

Hexadecimal and Decimal Values

ASCII / ISO 646 HEX DEC

RS 1E 30

GS 1D 29

EOT 04 04

c. Format header (Column 3) is a two-digit numeric identifier “06” or “07” which 

identifies the rules governing the message format. It is followed by Format 06/07 data 

qualifiers (DIs or DEIs in Columns 4 and 5, respectively), which define data content within the 

message.

d. Data field (Column 6) contains an abbreviated description of the data field. See 

Table A-I for a full description.

e. Data format type/length (Column 7) contains indicators of whether the data is alpha 

and/or numeric and the length of the actual data represented by this field (e.g. an5). A 

convention of “an..25” means a variable length data string of up to 25 alphanumeric characters, 

whereas “an25” means a fixed length of precisely 25 alphanumeric characters. A convention of 

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

APPENDIX A

118

“an13..15” means a minimum of 13 characters and a maximum of 15 characters. The plus 

symbol (+) is used to annotate how data formats are constructed in the data field; the plus sign 

is not part of the encoded data string. However, when referenced to a note in the data format 

column, the plus symbol (+) becomes part of the data sub-string to separate different types of 

data that are encoded within a single field (i.e., DIs 2L, 3L, and 5L). Variable length fields are 

not zero-filled unless the information is extracted from an external data source that requires 

leading zeros. If a DI or DEI is used to encode data for multiple applications, multiple data 

formats may be described.

f. Sample data (Column 8) contains sample encode value for the ASCII element 

indicated.

g. Label text. The Ammunition/Explosives Packaging Label uses this column in Table 

A-V to describe the abbreviation that should be used to describe the human-readable data 

printed on the label.

h. The generic MSL 2D (PDF417) bar code and the Ammunition/Explosives Packaging 

Label 2D (PDF417) bar code store a repeating set of selected data at the end of the bar code 

format.

(1) The repeating data set for the MSL reflects what is normally marked in the 

linear (Code 39) bar codes or the 2D (PDF417) bar code on a DD Form 

1348-1A. The data capacity restrictions of the MSL 2D (PDF417) bar code

will normally limit its content to ten line items depending on the amount of 

MSL and transportation control movement document (TCMD) data 

recorded. Each supply document series begins with a DI ‘12S’ and 

terminates with a DI ‘12Q’ code – if either of these two fields is blank, the 

blank field shall be encoded with the applicable DI.

(2) The repeating data set for the Ammunition/Explosives Packaging Label 2D 

(PDF417) bar code reflects the quantities of stock numbered assets or part 

numbered assets within each package or unit load. Each repeating data set 

series begins with a DI ‘N’ or DI ‘1P’ code.

A.2.4 Data syntax graphic. Figure A-2 is an example of how ANSI MH10.8.2 DIs and 

DoD DEIs are used in a 2D (PDF417) bar code to depict a single shipment unit TCMD with 

multiple supply line items within the shipment unit.

a. The transportation control number (TCN) and related TCMD data are contained in 

the first Format 06 block that terminates with an RS code followed by a Format 07 block that 

terminates with an RS code.

b. The supply line item data for specific document numbers are contained in a Format 

06 block that follows the TCMD data. Data looping is required to document a multipack 

shipment when multiple line items exist within a single shipment unit. In this data looping 

structure, the order in which the line items are encoded in the 2D (PDF417) bar code is critical 

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

APPENDIX A

119

to the meaning of the data. Additional Format 06 envelopes may also be used to denote the data 

looping relationship. The number of supply line item documents is limited by the storage 

capacity of the AIT device.

FIGURE A-2. 2D (PDF417) data syntax.

A.2.5 Encoding serial numbers. The following procedures accommodate two different 

encoding schemes: 1) A legacy requirement that encoded serial numbers separate from the item’s 

UII, and 2) a revised requirement that links an item’s UII to its serial number. The linked 

serialization numbers allow the transfer of associated data for serialized items within the supply 

chain when multiple like items (e.g. same NSN) are packaged and shipped together.

A.2.5.1 Syntax business rules for encoding linked serial numbers and UIIs. ISO/IEC 

15434 Format 06/07 envelopes shall be used to signal the context of the encoded relationships of 

the item data.

a. For a single item (quantity = 1), common data for the item shall be encoded in the 

ISO/IEC 15434 Format 06 and Format 07 envelopes, as applicable. The Format 06 envelope 

may also be used to associate item-specific data (e.g. serial number, UII, etc.) for the uniquely 

identified item. A single data qualifier or paired data qualifiers (‘S’, or ‘25S’, or ‘S’ and ‘25S’) 

may be used within the Format 06 envelope to identify and associate the serialized data for an 

item. This procedure can link one or more serial numbers and a UII to the same single item.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

APPENDIX A

120

b. For multiple items (quantity greater than 1), common data for the items shall be 

encoded in the ISO/IEC 15434 Format 06 and Format 07 envelopes, as applicable. An additional 

Format 06 envelope (one per item) shall be used for each item to encode item-specific data (e.g. 

serial number (DI ‘S’), UII (DI ‘25S’), lot/batch (DI ‘1T’), etc.) for the uniquely identified item. 

Additional information may be associated to each serialized item such as condition code, 

manufacturer CAGE, etc. A serial number and/or UII may or may not be encoded for each item.

NOTE: For multiple item entries (quantity greater than 1), if the 2D bar code reader decodes 

multiple serialization numbers (DI ‘S’ and/or DI ‘25S’) in the first Format 06 envelope, the 

system must assume there is no associated relationship between the serialization numbers. 

Previous versions of MIL-STD-129 used the first Format 06 envelope to encode separate lists of 

serial numbers (DI ‘S’) and UIIs (DI ‘25S’) – the serialized numbers (serial or UII) were not 

linked together for any one item. A serial number and/or UII may or may not be encoded for 

each item. Updated distribution systems must be able to decode the data in the legacy 2D 

symbol but should not generate any 2D symbols using the legacy business rule.

A.2.5.2 Data syntax example. The below example shows an extract of the data string 

syntax for encoding individual serial numbers, encoding UIIs, and linking an item’s serial 

number with a UII. The first Format 06 and 07 envelopes (06GS...RS07GS...RS) contain the 

common data for the item. The data string example is marked to show the data content within 

each Format 06 serial number and/or UII envelope.

[)>RS06GS...RS07GS...RS06GSS674A3604RS06GSS674A3605RS06GS25S06141411A0B9C3D5RS

06GS25S06141411A0B9C3D6RS06GS25SUN077991289674B36ABRS06GSS674B36ABRS

06GS25SUN077991289674B36ACGSS674B36ACRS06GS25S06141411A0B9C3D7GSS674A3608

RS

EOT

A.2.6 Table A-V Ammunition/Explosives Packaging Label specifications. The 

following business rules apply to the data elements of the Ammunition/Explosives Packaging 

Label 2D (PDF417) bar code. Mandatory data elements shall be encoded in the 2D (PDF417) 

bar code and printed on the label as a human translation of information in the 2D (PDF417) bar 

code if the element is applicable to the item or package mark. The DoD 4100.39, Vol 10, Table 

81, Unit of Measure Designation code or ANSI ASC X12.3 Data Element 355 (Unit or Basis for 

Measurement) code shall be printed as human-readable information on the labels. Each 

Service’s AIS shall provide for quantity conversions, if required, for unit of issue codes, unit of 

measure codes, and X12.3 Data Element 355 codes.

a. Label traceability code. The label traceability code is a mandatory data element 

identified by the ANSI MH10.8.2 data identifier ‘20S’.

(1) The label traceability code shall always be 20 characters long.

(2) Each label in a label series shall contain a traceability code, which shall be 

identical to all the other label serial numbers in the series, except for the last 

two characters (label “N” of “X”) if multiple labels are required. The label or 

label series represents the materiel contained in an ammo package. As many 

as nine labels may be contained in a label series.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

APPENDIX A

121

(3) Format is UMYYMMDDhhmmssssRRNX.

(4) UM = ANSI ASC X12.3 Data Element 355 (Unit or Basis for Measurement)

code for the package type. The package type is not generally the same as the 

materiel unit of issue, and shall be chosen from the permissible package 

types agreed to by the Services.

Label Traceability Code Package Types (UM)

Valid

X12.3 Code Definition

BX Box

CH Container

CN Can

DR Drum

KT Kit

PC Piece

PL Pallet/Unit Load

RL Roll

ST Set

EA Each

(5) Construction of the traceability code shall consist of the following sub 

elements: YY=year, MM=month, DD=date, hh=hour, mm=minute, 

ssss=seconds and hundredths of a second, RR=random number, NX=label N 

of X labels. No more than one label should be generated during each 

hundredth of a second for this traceability code format.

(6) An alternate for “ssss” in the traceability code is: ssss = a second (00 to 59) 

and the label number generated during that second (00 to 99) (i.e. “ssss” 

could equal 0000 to 5999). No more than 100 labels may be generated per 

second using this format.

(7) When multiple labels are required to mark a single entity, the first 18 

characters of the traceability code shall be common to each label series and 

the final two characters identify each label, e.g., 1 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3. If only 

a single label, use 1 of 1 (see Figure 49).

Type use Examples

Single label for a pallet PL090310142235587211

Series of labels for a pallet

where data requires two labels.

 First (1 of 2) label

 Second (2 of 2) label 

PL090310142235587212

PL090310142235587222

Single label for a box BX090310142235587211

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

APPENDIX A

122

b. Package weight (WT). Mandatory data element identified by the ANSI MH10.8.2 

data identifier ‘2Q’.

(1) Shall be a positive, non-zero quantity.

(2) Shall in the range of ‘.00000001’ to ‘999999999’.

(3) May be a decimal quantity.

(4) If a decimal quantity is used, the decimal character shall be a ‘.’ period.

(5) When encoded as ASCII characters, the total maximum length of the package 

weight is nine characters.

(6) Insignificant leading and trailing zeros shall be suppressed, except for a 

single leading zero for decimal quantities which have only a fractional part. 

For example, ‘.01’ and ‘0.01’ are permitted, but ‘00.01’, ‘123.00’, and ‘0123’

are not.

(7) Thousand separators or other digit group separators are not allowed.

(8) Only one DI ‘2Q’ may appear on a label or label series.

Type use Examples

Minimum weight .00000001

Maximum weight 999999999

Weight with a single leading 

zero for its whole number 0.025

c. Package weight unit. Optional data element if the package weight is in pounds; 

mandatory if other than pounds. Identified by the ANSI MH10.8.2 data identifier ‘3Q’.

(1) Only one DI ‘3Q’ shall be used on the lead label.

(2) Valid entries are ‘LB’ or ‘KG’ only.

Type use Examples

Weight is measured in pounds LG

Weight is measured in 

kilograms KG

d. Package cube (CU). Mandatory data element used to document the total cube 

(volume) of the package and is identified by the ANSI MH10.8.2 data identifier ‘18Q’.

(1) Shall be a positive, non-zero quantity.

(2) Shall in the range of ‘.00000001’ to ‘999999999’.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

APPENDIX A

123

(3) May be a decimal quantity.

(4) If a decimal quantity is used, the decimal character shall be a ‘.’ period.

(5) When encoded as ASCII characters, the total maximum length of the package 

weight is nine characters.

(6) Insignificant leading and trailing zeros shall be suppressed, except for a

single leading zero for decimal quantities, which have only a fractional part. 

For example, ‘.01’ and ‘0.01’ are permitted, but ‘00.01’, ‘123.00’, and ‘0123’

are not.

(7) Thousand separators or other digit group separators are not allowed.

(8) Only one DI ‘18Q’ may appear on a label or label series.

(9) Only valid entries are ‘CF’ cubic feet or ‘CR’ cubic meters.

Type use Examples

Minimum cube .00000001CF

.00000001CR

Maximum cube 999999999CF

999999999CR

Cube with a single leading zero 

for its whole number

0.025CF

0.025CR

e. National stock number(s) (NSN). Mandatory data element if assigned that is used for 

identification in all logistic processes and is identified by the ANSI MH10.8.2 data identifier ‘N’.

(1) If the materiel has an NSN assigned, it shall be used. If no NSN has been 

assigned, then the part number shall be used to identify the materiel.

(2) One or more NSNs may occur on the same label or label series.

(3) The NSN shall be either 13 characters long or 15 characters long if it 

includes the material management code (MMC).

(4) Dash characters which are sometimes used to visually identify logical 

constituents of the NSN (as in “1315-01-245-4950”) shall not be contained in 

the NSN encoded in the bar code.

Type use Examples

Nominal case 1315012450124

NSN with material 

management code (MMC) 1315012450124CM

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

APPENDIX A

124

f. Part number(s) (PN). Mandatory data element if the materiel does not have an NSN 

assigned and is identified by the ANSI MH10.8.2 data identifier ‘1P’.

(1) Used only if the materiel does not have an NSN assigned.

(2) One or more part numbers may occur on the same label or label series.

(3) The part number is 1 to 16 characters long.

Type use Example

Nominal case C995

g. Department of Defense identification code (DODIC). Mandatory data element for 

materiel that has been assigned one. It provides a means for materiel handlers to easily identify 

the type of ammunition and is identified by the ANSI MH10.8.2 data identifier ‘4R’.

(1) If a DODIC has not been assigned, it shall not be used or encoded.

(2) A DODIC always applies to the NSN or PN which preceded the DODIC in 

the bar code.

(3) The DODIC is exactly four characters long.

Type use Example

Nominal case C995

h. Hazardous material code. Mandatory data element for material that has been assigned 

a United Nations (UN) or North American (NA) HAZMAT identification number and is 

identified by the ANSI MH10.8.2 data identifier ‘10P’.

(1) If a hazardous material code has not been assigned, it shall not be used or 

encoded.

(2) A hazardous material code always applies to the NSN or PN which preceded 

the hazardous material code in the bar code.

(3) At most, one hazardous material code may be encoded in the bar code for 

each NSN or PN.

(4) Systems shall ensure that they maintain the ability to read the legacy MILSTD-129 ammo/explosives label UN HAZMAT identification number 

format of an1+an..4; for example U1234.

Type use Example Data Human Readable

UN Number DUN1234 UN1234

NA Number DNA3456 NA3456

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

APPENDIX A

125

i. Nomenclature. Mandatory data element that provides a description of the materiel 

contained in the package and is identified by the ANSI MH10.8.2 data identifier ‘6W’.

(1) Authoritative source for the nomenclature is the Federal Logistic Information 

System.

(2) If the materiel does not have an assigned nomenclature, the nomenclature

field shall contain a user defined accurate description of the asset.

(3) If the nomenclature length is more than 44 characters (includes spaces), the 

nomenclature shall be truncated so that the left-most 44 characters are 

retained.

(4) The nomenclature always applies to the NSN or PN which preceded the 

nomenclature in the bar code.

(5) At most, one nomenclature shall be encoded for each NSN or PN.

(6) Leading or trailing spaces in the nomenclature shall not be encoded.

(7) Embedded spaces separating words in the nomenclature shall be encoded.

Type use Examples

Nominal case BOMB GP 2000 LB MK84-2 

TRITONAL LDD

Truncated representation PROJ5/38VTNF MK31,35,49NSD ADF 

GRAY BRST STA

Note that this is a (hypothetical) 44 

character truncated representation. The 

non-truncated representation is 

“PROJ5/38VTNF MK31,35,49NSD 

ADF GRAY BRST STANDARD 

ISSUE”

j. Lot number(s) (Lot). Mandatory data element if assigned that identifies a 

manufacture’s batch of production and is identified by the ANSI MH10.8.2 data identifier ‘1T’.

(1) Lot number is in the range 1 to 17 characters in length.

(2) The dash ‘-’ is the only special character allowed.

(3) Not all ammunition and explosives are assigned a lot number for 

management.

(4) More than one lot number may be encoded under a given NSN or PN.

(5) Lot number may also have serialized items within the lot.

(6) The lot number always applies to the NSN or PN which preceded the lot 

number in the bar code.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

APPENDIX A

126

Type use Example

Nominal case LC-05A603L362A

k. Serial number(s). Mandatory data element if assigned and is identified by the ANSI

MH10.8.2 data identifier ‘S’.

(1) Serial number is in the range ‘1’ to ‘30’ characters in length: ‘0’ through ‘9’ 

and ‘A’ through ‘Z’.

(2) The dash ‘-’ is the only special character allowed.

(3) If materiel does not have an assigned serial number, the serial number field 

shall not be encoded.

(4) More than one serial number may be encoded in the bar code for each NSN 

or PN if no lot number is assigned.

(5) When materiel has a lot number assigned, the serial number(s) are repeated 

under the lot number level.

(6) Where materiel has a lot number and serial numbers assigned, the number of

serial numbers listed for each lot should equal the lot number quantity. For 

example, Lot 09TL001-001 has serialized assets and four items are in the 

package (LOT: 09TL001-001, QTY/UI 4 EA, SN: THL1111, THL2222, 

THL3333, and THL4444).

(7) A serial number with the same lot number and stock number shall not appear 

more than once on the same label.

Type use Examples

Nominal case 517883

L1234-123

l. Quantity (unit of measure). Mandatory data element which consists of two sub data 

elements. The first nine digits identify the item count. Unit of measure information for the last 

two characters is sourced from the system of record and encoded using an ANSI ASC X12.3 

Data Element 355 (Unit or Basis for Measurement) code for the respective unit of measure. 

Identified by the ANSI MH10.8.2 data identifier ‘7Q’.

(1) Digits shall be a positive, non-zero quantity.

(2) Digits shall in the range of ‘.00000001’ to ‘999999999’.

(3) Count may be a decimal quantity.

(4) If a decimal quantity is used, the decimal character shall be a ‘.’ period

(5) When encoded as ASCII characters to accommodate decimal values, the total 

maximum length of the quantity is nine characters.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

APPENDIX A

127

(6) For the item count, insignificant leading and trailing zeros shall be 

suppressed, except for a single leading zero for decimal quantities which 

have only a fractional part. For example, ‘.01’ and ‘0.01’ are permitted, but 

‘00.01’, ‘123.00’, and ‘0123’ are not.

(7) Thousand separators or other digit group separators are not allowed.

(8) The quantity field is included in the stock level detail and if there is more 

than one lot number, it is repeated for each lot number as well. Thus, the 

label shows the total count of the NSN and count for each lot number.

(9) Valid codes to encode the information are extracted from the ANSI ASC

X12.3 Data Element 355 (Unit or Basis for Measurement) codes and they are 

shown in Table A-V of this standard.

(10) Printed human-readable information. The DoD 4100.39, Vol 10, Table 81, 

Unit of Measure Designation code or ANSI ASC X12.3 Data Element 355 

(Unit or Basis for Measurement) code shall be printed as human-readable 

information on the labels. Each Service’s AIS shall provide for quantity 

conversions, if required, for unit of issue codes, unit of measure codes, and 

X12.3 Data Element 355 codes.

Type use Example

Nominal case 2EA

m. Condition code. Optional data element that is used to identify the condition of 

materiel in the package and is identified by the ANSI MH10.8.2 data identifier ‘2R’.

(1) Always a single alphabetic character.

(2) Valid characters are ‘A’ through ‘H’, ‘J’ through ‘N’, ‘P’ through ‘S’, or ‘V’.

(3) Empty condition code DI shall not be encoded.

(4) Condition code always consists of a single alphabetic character.

(5) A condition code always applies to the level of the data hierarchy (lot 

number, or serial number) which preceded it in the bar code. If the condition 

code follows a lot number, it shall apply to all the items that follow for that 

lot number. If the condition code follows a serial number, it applies to only 

that serial number.

Type use Example

Nominal case B 

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

APPENDIX A

128

n. Container ID. Optional data element that is used to identify a package. Identified by 

the ANSI MH10.8.2 data identifier ‘1B’.

(1) Container ID is a 2 to 11 character alphanumeric identifier.

(2) The dash ‘-’ is the only special character allowed.

(3) If materiel does not have an assigned container ID, the container ID field 

shall not be encoded in the bar code.

(4) Only one DI ‘1B’ may appear on a label or label series.

Type use Examples

Nominal case TGHU2962459

85AF032

o. Document number. Optional data element that indicates the materiel release order 

document number (requisition number) for the package contents. Identified by the ANSI

MH10.8.2 data identifier ‘12S’.

(1) Document number is 14 to 15 alphanumeric characters: ‘0’ through ‘9’ and 

‘A’ through ‘Z’.

(2) No special characters are allowed.

(3) An empty document number DI shall not be encoded.

(4) A document number always applies to the level of the data hierarchy (lot 

number, or serial number) which preceded it in the bar code. If the document 

number follows a lot number, it shall apply to all the items that follow for 

that lot number. If the document number follows a serial number, it applies 

to only that serial number.

Type use Examples

Nominal case W81YWB63250111

FV336572345000

p. Expiration date. Optional data element that indicates maintenance, expiration, next 

inspection (M.E.N.) in which the materiel shall be recertified before utilization. Identified by the 

ANSI MH10.8.2 data identifier ‘14D’.

(1) Expiration date always consists of an 8-character numeric date 

(YYYYMMDD) identifier.

(2) An empty expiration date DI shall not be encoded.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

APPENDIX A

129

(3) Month and day parts shall be left-padded with zeros, if needed, to ensure that 

both the month and day parts are each two characters long.

(4) The month part shall be in the range ‘01’ through ‘12’.

(5) DD shall always be last day of the month.

(6) An expiration date always applies to the level of the data hierarchy (lot 

number, or serial number) which preceded it in the bar code. If the 

expiration date follows a lot number, it shall apply to all the items that follow 

for that lot number. If the expiration date follows a serial number, it applies 

to only that serial number.

(7) A line item (lot quantity or serialized item) may have only one expiration 

date.

Type use Example

Nominal case (July 2009) 20090731

q. Facility/building. Optional data element used to record the intended or actual 

building, facility, vessel, or other storage location in which a package is stored. Identified by the

ANSI MH10.8.2 data identifier ‘L’.

(1) Facility/building is a 1 to 14 character alphanumeric identifier.

(2) If the materiel does not have a facility or building assigned, then it shall not 

be encoded.

(3) Only one DI may appear on a unit load label or label series.

(4) Empty location/grids shall not be encoded.

Type use Example

Nominal case 4047A

0101C0

r. Location/grid. Optional data element used to record the intended or actual storage 

location within a facility/building in which a package is stored. Identified by the ANSI

MH10.8.2 data identifier ‘20L’.

(1) Location/grid is a 1 to 14 character alphanumeric identifier.

(2) If the materiel does not have location assigned, then it shall not be encoded

(3) Only one DI ‘20L’ may appear on a unit load label or label series.

(4) Empty location/grids shall not be encoded.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

APPENDIX A

130

Type use Example

Nominal case 4047A002C001A

ABAB

s. Owner code. Optional data element used to indicate the owner of the materiel. The 

owner code is used as a key field for identifying an ammunition line item and is used in all 

logistics processes of some Services. Identified by the ANSI MH10.8.2 data identifier ‘7V’.

(1) Owner code is a single numeric character.

(2) No special characters are allowed.

(3) Empty owner code DI shall not be encoded.

(4) An owner code always applies to the level of the data hierarchy (NSN/PN, lot 

number, or serial number) which preceded it in the bar code. If the owner 

code appears after an NSN/PN, it shall apply to all the items that follow for 

that NSN/PN. If the owner code follows a lot number, it shall apply to all the 

items that follow for that lot number. If the owner code follows a serial 

number, it applies to only that serial number.

Type use Example

Nominal case 5

t. Purpose code / activity classification code (ACC). Optional data element used to 

indicate the reason for which the materiel is being held in inventory. Identified by the ANSI

MH10.8.2 data identifier ‘86Y’.

(1) Purpose code and ACC share the same DI but are programmatically 

identified by the first alphabetic character ‘P’ for “purpose” or ‘A’ for 

“activity”.

(2) The purpose code valid characters are: ‘A’ through ‘H’, ‘J’ through ‘N’, ‘P’, 

‘Q’, ‘S’, ‘T’, ‘V’, ‘W’, ‘Y’, and ‘Z’.

(3) The activity classification code valid characters are: ‘A’ through ‘H’, ‘J’ 

through ‘N’, ‘Q’, ‘R’, ‘T’, ’V’, ‘W’, and ‘Z’.

(4) Empty purpose code / ACC DI shall not be encoded.

(5) A purpose code always applies to the level of the data hierarchy (NSN/PN, 

lot number, or serial number) which preceded it in the bar code. If the 

purpose code appears after an NSN/PN, it shall apply to all the items that 

follow for that NSN/PN. If the purpose code follows a lot number, it shall

apply to all the items that follow for that lot number. If the purpose code 

follows a serial number, it applies to only that serial number.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

APPENDIX A

131

Type use Example

Nominal case (purpose code ‘A’)

Nominal case (ACC ‘B’)

PA

AB

u. QA certification date. Optional data element used to document the date that a quality 

assurance inspector certified the package integrity and item condition located within the package. 

Identified by the ANSI MH10.8.2 data identifier ‘20D’.

(1) QA certification date consists of nine characters (DDMMMYYYY).

(2) Empty QA certification dates shall not be encoded.

(3) The DD (day of month) part of the QA certification date shall be consistent 

with the month selected. For example 31 MAR would be acceptable, 

whereas 31 APR would not.

(4) The DD (day of month) part shall be left-padded with a zero, if needed to 

ensure that it is two characters long. For example, 02MAR2009 would be 

correct; 2MAR2009 would not be correct.

(5) The MMM (month) part shall be one of the following: ‘JAN’, ‘FEB’, 

‘MAR’, ‘APR’, ‘MAY’, ‘JUN’, ‘JUL’, ‘AUG’, ‘SEP’, ‘OCT’, ‘NOV’, 

‘DEC’.

(6) A QA certification date always applies to the level of the data hierarchy (lot 

number, or serial number) which preceded it in the bar code. If the QA 

certification date follows a lot number, it shall apply to all the items that 

follow for that lot number. If the QA certification date follows a serial 

number, it applies to only that serial number.

Type use Example

Nominal case 04JUL2009

v. QA defect code. Optional data element used to identify defects known to exist for the 

materiel in or on the package. Identified by the ANSI MH10.8.2 data identifier ‘37Y’.

(1) The QA defect code shall always consist of six alphanumeric characters. ‘0’ 

through ‘9’ and ‘A’ through ‘Z’.

(2) No special characters are allowed.

(3) Empty QA defect code DI shall not be encoded.

(4) A line item (lot quantity or serialized item) may contain up to two QA defect 

codes.

(5) A QA defect code always applies to the level of the data hierarchy (lot 

number, or serial number) which preceded it in the bar code. If the QA 

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

APPENDIX A

132

defect code follows a lot number, it shall apply to all the items that follow for 

that lot number. If the QA defect code follows a serial number, it applies to 

only that serial number.

Type use Examples

Nominal case 1551AW

HAN25D

w. QA stamp. Optional data element used to identify the individual and activity 

performing the most recent inspection on the asset. Identified by the ANSI MH10.8.2 data 

identifier ‘1H’.

(1) QA stamp consists of 9 to 10 alphanumeric characters ‘0’ through ‘9’ and 

‘A’ through ‘Z’.

(2) Empty QA stamp DI shall not be encoded.

(3) QA stamp is always accompanied with a QA certification date.

(4) A QA stamp always applies to the level of the data hierarchy (lot number, or 

serial number) which preceded it in the bar code. If the QA stamp follows a 

lot number, it shall apply to all the items that follow for that lot number. If 

the QA stamp follows a serial number, it applies to only that serial number.

Type use Examples

Nominal case FV5872001

1234567890

x. Weapon stock number (WSN). Optional data element used to associate a set of 

individual components that make up a single round. Identified by the ANSI MH10.8.2 data 

identifier ‘30T’.

(1) WSN is a 1 to 14 character alphanumeric identifier.

(2) If the materiel does not have a WSN assigned, then it shall not be encoded.

(3) Only one DI ‘30T’ may appear on a unit load label or label series.

Type use Examples

Nominal case BC27A462500564

BJ97B522800238

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

APPENDIX A

133

TABLE A-I. 2D (PDF417) bar code data identifier descriptions (Format 06).

Format 06

Data

Identifier

Format 06

DoD Usage (See Note 1)

Data Sources

J

(JKUSM)

Transportation Control Number (TCN)

Data identifier ‘KUSM’ follows DI ‘J’ to provide global 

uniqueness IAW ISO/IEC 15459-1 formats.

DTR Pt II Table 208-2

DTR Pt II App L

DTR Pt II App M

6J

(6JKUSM)

Transportation Tracking Number (TTN)

Data identifier ‘KUSM’ follows the DI ‘6J’ to provide 

global uniqueness IAW ISO/IEC 15459-1 formats.

DTR Pt II Chapter 208

1B Container ID – Used for non-ISO containers. System of Record

3D Ship Date – format YDDD. DTR Pt II Table 208-2

14D Expiration Date – format YYYYMMDD System of Record

20D QA Cert Date – format DDMMMYYYY System of Record

1H QA Stamp System of Record

I Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) DTR Pt II Chapter 208

4K Contract Line Item Number (CLIN) Contract

5K Contractor Shipment Number DD Form 250

8K Contract Number Contract

9K Transportation Account Code (TAC)

DTR Pt II Table 208-2

DTR Pt II App M

DTR Pt II App L

DTR Pt II App V

L Facility/Building – Storage location System of Record

2L

Ship To Address – up to 5 lines of 35 characters.

See Note 2.

DTR Pt II Table 208-2

3L

From Address - up to 3 lines of 35 characters.

See Note 2.

DTR Pt II Table 208-2

5L

Consignee Address - up to 5 lines of 35 characters.

See Note 2.

DTR Pt II Table 208-2

20L Location/Grid System of Record

51L Origin Zip Code – for SEAVAN point of origin.

DTR Pt II App M (TCMD T_9,

 Table M-14, rp 9-14)

N

National/NATO Stock Number (NSN) – or stock 

identification elements thereof.

DTR Pt II App M (TCMD T_6) 

DD 1348-1A

1P Part Number – assigned by manufacturer. As marked

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

APPENDIX A

134

TABLE A-I. 2D (PDF417) bar code data identifier descriptions (Format 06) - Continued.

Format 06

Data

Identifier

Format 06

DoD Usage (See Note 1)

Data Sources

10P

(10PD)

Hazardous Material Code

Data identifier ‘D’ (ANSI ASC X12.3 Data Element 208) 

follows DI ‘10P’ to further qualify the data as a Title 49

CFR, Part 172.101 hazardous materials identification 

number in the form of UNnnnn or NAnnnn.

See Format 07 DEI ‘41’/‘42’ for TCMD UN code or North 

American code applications.

See Format 07 DEI ‘49’ for TCMD air commodity/special 

handling code.

As marked

2Q

Weight - with optional metric unit of value for cargo.

Default = pounds.

See Note 3.

DTR Pt II Table 208-2

3Q Weight Units DTR Pt II Table 208-2

7Q

Quantity (Unit of Issue (UI))

See Note 5. 

DD 1348-1A (rp 25-29) = Qty

DD 1348-1A (rp 23/24) = UI

Quantity (Unit of Measure (UM))

See Note 5.

FLIS

System of record

Weight

See Table A-V Notes 1 and 2 for legacy ammo label use.

As marked

Cube

See Table A-V Notes 1 and 2 for legacy ammo label use.

As marked

12Q Unit Price – with unit of value = USD. DD 1348-1A (rp 74-80)

13Q Piece Number / Total Pieces - piece n of x of pieces. DTR Pt II Table 208-2

18Q Cube (Gross) As marked

2R Condition Code DD 1348-1A (rp 71)

4R DoD Identification Code (DODIC) DTR Pt II App M (TCMD T_6)

S Serial Number or Code As marked

12S Supply Documentation Number – and suffix code when 

applicable.

DD 1348-1A (rp 30-44)

13S Security Seal Number DTR Pt II App M (TCMD T_9,

 Table M-14)

20S Traceability Code/Serial Number As generated or marked

25S

Unique Item Identifier (UII) – documents as a single 

value the UII elements of an item unique identification 

(IUID) mark or the DoD IUID equivalent mark as specified 

in MIL-STD-130.

Derived from the item IUID 

mark

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

APPENDIX A

135

TABLE A-I. 2D (PDF417) bar code data identifier descriptions (Format 06) - Continued.

Format 06

Data

Identifier

Format 06

DoD Usage (See Note 1)

Data Sources

1T Lot/Batch Number or Traceability Number – for a group 

of entities.

DTR Pt II App M (TCMD T_7)

DD 1348-1A

30T Weapons Stock Number (WSN) System of Record

V

Routing Identifier Code (RIC) – Shipping Activity – The 

“From” RIC for shipper.

DD 1348-1A (rp 4-6)

4V Ocean Carrier Code – for SEAVANs.

DTR Pt II App M (TCMD T_9, 

 Table M-14) 

DTR Pt II App SS

7V Ownership Code DLM 4000.25-2-M, App 2.3

8V

Distribution Cognizance Code – last 2 positions of DoD

distribution code used for DD Form 1348-1A linear bar 

code.

DD 1348-1A (rp 55-56)

17V

Commercial and Government Entity (CAGE) Code –

The consignor CAGE code for an MSL or the CAGE code

for a container ID mark of the company awarded the 

contract for the item being shipped.

As marked.

6W Nomenclature System of Record

37Y QA Defect Code System of Record

86Y Purpose Code or Activity Classification Code System of Record

TABLE A-I. 2D (PDF417) bar code data identifier descriptions (Format 07).

Format 07

Data Element

Identifier

Format 07

DoD Usage (See Note 1)

Data Sources

03 Project Code

DD 1348-1A (rp 57-59)

DTR Pt II Table 208-2

DTR Pt II App M

04 Unit Line Number (ULN) – for unit move MSL.

DTR Pt II Chapter 208

DTR Pt II App M (TCMD T_9,

 Table M-13, rp 58-64)

05 Unit Identification Code (UIC) – for unit move MSL. DTR Pt II Chapter 208

06 Bumper Number

DTR Pt II Chapter 208

DTR Pt II App M (TCMD T_9,

 Table M-18)

09 Unit Equipment Description – for unit move. DTR Pt II Chapter 208

10 Model Identifier – for equipment or vehicle identifier. DTR Pt II Chapter 208

DTR Pt II App M (TCMD T_5)

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

APPENDIX A

136

TABLE A-I. 2D (PDF417) bar code data identifier descriptions (Format 07) - Continued.

Format 07

Data Element

Identifier

Format 07

DoD Usage (See Note 1)

Data Sources

12

Cube – with optional metric unit of value for cargo.

Default = cubic feet.

See Note 3.

DTR Pt II Table 208-2

15 Water Commodity/Special Handling Codes

DTR Pt II Chapter 208

DTR Pt II App M

DTR Pt II App KK

DTR Pt II App LL

18

Length – with optional metric unit of value for cargo.

Default = inches.

See Note 3.

DTR Pt II Chapter 208

DTR Pt II App M

19

Width – with optional metric unit of value for cargo.

Default = inches.

See Note 3.

DTR Pt II Chapter 208

DTR Pt II App M

20

Height – with optional metric unit of value for cargo.

Default = inches.

See Note 3.

DTR Pt II Chapter 208

DTR Pt II App M

21 Pallet Identifier DTR Pt II App M (TCMD T-9,

 Table M-22)

23 Air Dimension Code DTR Pt II App M

DTR Pt II App BB

24 Container Number Code – last five digits of van and other 

container numbers.

DTR Pt II App M (TCMD

 T_1/2/3/4, rp 4-8)

DTR Pt II App QQ

25 Port of Embarkation (POE) Code

DTR Pt II Table 208-2

DTR Pt II App M

DTR Pt II App CC

DTR Pt II App MM

26 Port of Debarkation (POD) Code

DTR Pt II Table 208-2

DTR Pt II App M

DTR Pt II App CC

DTR Pt II App MM

27 Consignee DoD Activity Address Code (DODAAC) – for 

the receiving ultimate consignee or mark for consignee.

DD 1348-1A

DTR Pt II Table 208-2

DTR Pt II App M

28 Transportation Priority – 1 through 4.

DTR Pt II Table 208-2

DTR Pt II App M

DTR Pt II Para 203 B.3

29 Consignor DoD Activity Address Code (DODAAC) – for 

the shipper or loading activity.

DTR Pt II Table 208-2

DTR Pt II App M

30 Mode/Method Code – of shipment.

DTR Pt II App M

DTR Pt II App GG

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

APPENDIX A

137

TABLE A-I. 2D (PDF417) bar code data identifier descriptions (Format 07) - Continued.

Format 07

Data Element

Identifier

Format 07

DoD Usage (See Note 1)

Data Sources

32

Required Delivery Date (RDD) – may reflect RDD in 

DDD format or special codes, e.g., expedited shipment and 

handling (Code 999), Not Mission Capable Supply (NMCS) 

(Code N__), etc.

DD 1348-1A (rp 62-64)

DTR Pt II Table 208-2

DTR Pt II App M

34 TCMD/Manifest Doc ID Code – Document Identifier 

Code (DIC)

DTR Pt II App M

DTR Pt II App DD

35 Text Comment – the system shall be expecting and be able 

to accommodate text comment information. As Required

36

Serial Number / Package ID

Also see Format 06 DI ‘I’ for VIN.

DTR Pt II Chapter 208

DTR Pt II App M (TCMD T_5)

38 Nomenclature

DD 1348-1A

DTR Pt II App M (TCMD

T_5/T_6)

39 Number of Rounds – of ammunition. DTR Pt II App M (TCMD T_6)

40 United Nations (UN) Class/Division Code DTR Pt II App M (TCMD T_6)

41

UN/NA Indicator – designates UN or North American 

source for the UN/NA identification number.

See Note 4.

DTR Pt II App M (TCMD T_6)

42

UN/North American ID Number

See Note 4.

DTR Pt II App M (TCMD T_6)

43 Compatibility Group Code DTR Pt II App M (TCMD T_6)

44 Net Explosive Weight DTR Pt II App M (TCMD T_7)

48 Type Service DTR Pt II App GG

49 Air Commodity/Special Handling Codes DTR Pt II App M, TCMD T_8

DTR Pt II App Z

50 Type Pack Code DTR Pt II App M

DTR Pt II App UU

51 SEAVAN Ownership Code

DTR Pt II App M (TCMD T_2,

 Table M-5)

DTR Pt II App TT

55 Consignee Distribution (CDIST) Code DTR Pt II App M (TCMD T_2,

 Tables M-4 & M-5, rp 57)

56 Number of Shipment Units in Van DTR Pt II App M (TCMD T_2, 

 Table M-5, rp 58-59)

57 Number of Pieces in Van DTR Pt II App M (TCMD T_2, 

 Table M_5, rp 68-71)

58 Van Inside Cube - default = cubic feet.

DTR Pt II App M (TCMD T_2, 

 Table M_5, rp 64-67)

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

APPENDIX A

138

TABLE A-I. 2D (PDF417) bar code data identifier descriptions (Format 07) - Continued.

Format 07

Data Element

Identifier

Format 07

DoD Usage (See Note 1)

Data Sources

59 Van Length

Default = feet.

DTR Pt II App M (TCMD T_2,

 Table M_5, rp 13-14)

60 Van Number – complete serial number or ISO ID serial 

number (without check digit or owner code).

DTR Pt II App M (TCMD T_9,

 Table M-14, rp 56-63)

61 Check Digit - of the van number.

DTR Pt II App M (TCMD T_9,

 Table M-14)

62 Temperature Range - shown in Fahrenheit degrees.

DTR Pt II App M (TCMD T_9,

 Table M-14

63 Stopoff Number and Consignee DODAAC DTR Pt II App M (TCMD T_9,

 Table M-15, rp 54-65)

67 FMS Case Number - foreign military sales case # for 

MSL.

DTR Pt II Table 208-2

76 Stopoff Consolidation Code - stopoff point for delivery.

DTR Pt II App M (TCMD T_3/4

Note for rp 63)

Note 1. For an updated list of Format 06 DIs and Format 07 DEIs selected for use by DoD, refer to the 

USTRANSCOM AIT web site at http://www.transcom.mil/ait/ (Library > Standards and Formats).

Note 2. In order to provide space in the 2D (PDF417) bar code for multiple supply line item data, the in-the-clear 

address data is not printed in the 2D (PDF417) bar code for shipment units containing multiple supply line items 

(multipack or consolidated shipment). The fifth line in the “Ship To” and “Consignee” address blocks are to 

accommodate alternative addressing options. The “From” address line is structured as 3 lines of 35 characters to 

accommodate DLA addressing options and to save space on the MSL.

Note 3. To accommodate current automated information systems, US default values are assumed as shown. Metric 

data values may be used in the 2D (PDF417) bar code for generic MSL shipment descriptions, but the data values 

shall be marked with metric units using ANSI ASC X12.3 Data Element 355 (Unit or Basis for Measurement)

codes. The ANSI ASC X12.3 data elements selected for use are: KG = kilograms, CM = centimeter, CC = cubic 

centimeter, MR = meter, CR = cubic meter. Decimal values are allowed in the 2D (PDF417) bar code. Human 

translations of measurements printed on the DoD MSL shall be in MILSTRIP/DLMS unit of issue text and numeric 

values shall be rounded to the next higher whole number with leading zeros suppressed.

Note 4. Format 07 DEI ‘41’ is the qualifier for DEI ‘42’. That is, DEI ‘41’ indicates whether the code value in DEI 

‘42’ came from the UN or a North American table of values, e.g., International Maritime dangerous goods code, 

Title 49 CFR, or other source publication.

Note 5. DI ‘7Q’ may be used to encode many different type of measurements (quantity, weight, cube, shape, etc.) It 

may be used many times within a single 2D (PDF417) bar code; however, each instance of use shall be for the same 

type of measurement (e.g., it cannot be used for both quantity and weight in the same bar code.) The encoded data 

element consists of two sub data elements. The digits identify the item count. The last two characters are a 

machine-readable code from ANSI ASC X12.3 Data Elements 355 (Unit or Basis for Measurement) that identifies

the DoD 4100.39-M, Vol. 10, Table 53 supply item unit of issue or the Table 81 supply item unit of measure 

designations.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

APPENDIX A

139

TABLE A-II. MSL (generic) 2D (PDF417) bar code format.

Compliance 

Indicator

Element 

Separators

Format Header

Format 06 DI

Format 07 DEI

Data Field Data Format

Type/Length

Sample Data without 

DI/DEI

[)> Message Header Compliance 

Indicator [)>

RS 06 Data Identifier Format Header 06

GS JKUSM TCN an17 SW81238350D001XXX

GS 6JKUSM TTN

Note: The TTN should only be 

used for unit move cargo 

documented with a unit move 

TCN.

n17 12345678901000007

GS 3D Ship Date an4 1090

GS 9K TAC an4 SZZZ

GS 2L Ship To Address

See Note 1.

an..35+ an..35+ 

an..35+ an..35+ 

an..35

See Note 3

1

st address line+2nd

address line+3rd address 

line+4th address line+5th

address line

GS 3L From Address

See Note 1.

an..35+ an..35+ 

an..35

See Note 3

1

st address line+2nd

address line+3rd address 

line

GS 5L Consignee Address

See Note 1.

an..35+ an..35+ 

an..35+ an..35+ 

an..35

See Note 3

1

st address line+2nd

address line+3rd address 

line+4th address line+5th

address line

GS 51L Origin Zip Code 

for SEAVAN point of origin.

an5 45324

GS N NSN

See Note 2.

an..13 1234567890123

GS 2Q Weight (shipment piece)

default = pounds.

an..5+../an2

See Note 4

7760

Or metric: 1759/KG

GS 13Q Piece Number /Total Pieces an..4/an..4 1/1

GS 4R DODIC

See Note 2.

an4 PL23

GS 13S Security Seal Number an8 90876787

GS 1T Lot Number

See Note 2.

an..25 MCG77G002-060

GS 4V Ocean Carrier Code an4 SEAU

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

APPENDIX A

140

TABLE A-II. MSL (generic) 2D (PDF417) bar code format - Continued.

Compliance 

Indicator

Element 

Separators

Format Header

Format 06 DI

Format 07 DEI

Data Field Data Format

Type/Length

Sample Data without 

DI/DEI

GS 17V CAGE Code – Consignor. an5 6R517

RS 07 Free Form Text Format Header 07

GS 03 Project Code an3 9BU

GS 10 Model Identifier an..10 KZ456754

GS 12 Cube (shipment piece) an..4+../an2

See Note 4

35

GS 15 Water Commodity/Special 

Handling Codes

an5 390Z9

GS 18 Length

Default = inches.

n..6+../an2

See Note 4

1239

GS 19 Width

Default = inches.

n..4+../an2

See Note 4

123

GS 20 Height

Default = inches.

n..4+../an2

See Note 4

135

GS 21 Pallet Identifier an..6 DOVARC

GS 23 Air Dimension Code an1 A 

GS 24 Container Number Code an5 13579

GS 25 POE Code an3 DOV

GS 26 POD Code an3 RMS

GS 27 Consignee DODAAC an6 W55XGJ

GS 28 Transportation Priority n1 1

GS 29 Consignor DODAAC an6 SW8123

GS 30 Method Code an1 B

GS 32 RDD an..3 999

GS 34 TCMD/Manifest Doc ID Code 

(header DIC only)

an3 TX1

GS 35 Text Comment an..60 NO LINE ITEM DATA

GS 36 Serial Number an..13 234567890123

GS 38 Nomenclature an..14 Boots

GS 39 Number of Rounds n..6 112000

GS 40 UN Class/Division Code an2 11

GS 41 UN/NA Indicator an2 UN

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

APPENDIX A

141

TABLE A-II. MSL (generic) 2D (PDF417) bar code format - Continued.

Compliance 

Indicator

Element 

Separators

Format Header

Format 06 DI

Format 07 DEI

Data Field Data Format

Type/Length

Sample Data without 

DI/DEI

GS 42 UN/NATO ID Number an4 2766

GS 43 Compatibility Group Code an1 Z

GS 44 Net Explosive Weight n..6 449800

GS 48 Type Service an..10 Frt LTL

GS 49 Air Commodity/Special 

Handling Codes

an2 AZ 

GS 50 Type Pack Code an2 BX

GS 51 SEAVAN Ownership Code an4 SEAU

GS 55 CDIST Code for number of 

Consignees

an1 M

GS 56 SUs in Van n2 12

GS 57 Pieces in Van n4 1234

GS 58 Van Inside Cube an..4 1234

GS 59 Van Length an..2 40

GS 60 Van Number (complete) an8 12345678

GS 61 Check Digit n1 9

GS 62 Temperature Range an..5 F632

GS 63 Stopoff Number and 

Consignee DODAAC

n..2+an6 1AF5612

GS 67 FMS Case Number an3 CKM

GS 76 Stopoff Consolidation Code an1 X

The following sets of data (DI ‘12S’ through ‘12Q’) repeat for each supply line item in the shipment.

ISO/IEC 15434 Format 06 envelopes may be used to associate line item specific data (e.g. document number, NSN, 

quantity, etc.). Each supply document series shall begin with a DI ‘12S’ and terminate with a DI ‘12Q’ code – if 

either of these two fields are blank, they shall be encoded. 

RS 06 Data Identifier Format Header 06

GS 12S Supply Document Number an14..15 WK4GEY80110231

GS N NSN an..15 5310011987585

GS 4R DODIC (ammo only) an4 PL23

GS 1T Lot Number (ammo only) an..25 MCG77G002-060

GS 7Q Quantity (Unit of Issue) n..5+an2

See Note 5

5EA 

GS V Routing Identifier Code an3 S9I

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

APPENDIX A

142

TABLE A-II. MSL (generic) 2D (PDF417) bar code format - Continued.

Compliance 

Indicator

Element 

Separators

Format Header

Format 06 DI

Format 07 DEI

Data Field Data Format

Type/Length

Sample Data without 

DI/DEI

GS 2R Condition Code an1 A

GS 8V Distribution Code an2 7V

GS 12Q Unit Price n..9+.n2+an3 12345.90USD

RS 06 Data Identifier Format Header 06

GS 12S Supply Document Number an14..15 WK4GEY80110232

GS N NSN an..15 5310011987585

GS 4R DODIC (ammo only) an4 PL23

GS 1T Lot Number (ammo only) an..25 MCG77G002-060

GS 7Q Quantity (Unit of Issue) n..5+an2

See Note 5

5EA 

GS V Routing Identifier Code an3 S9I

GS 2R Condition Code an1 A

GS 8V Distribution Code an2 7V

GS 12Q Unit Price n..9+.n2+an3 12345.90USD

RS

EOT

Format Trailer

Message Trailer

Note 1. In order to provide space in the 2D (PDF417) bar code for multiple supply line item data, the in-the-clear 

address data is not printed in the 2D (PDF417) bar code for shipment units containing multiple supply line items 

(multipack or consolidated shipment).

Note 2. The Format 06, DI ‘N’, ‘4R’, or ‘1T’ elements shall only be shown in this part of the 2D (PDF417) bar 

code if TCMD T_6 data or TCMD T-7 data is available as a source. In most cases, NSN information will not be 

available from TCMD T_6 data for a shipment unit of consolidated multiple line items.

Note 3. The plus symbol (+) is used as a delimiter between the data elements and is part of the data sub-string.

Note 4. To accommodate current automated information systems, US default values are assumed as shown. Metric 

data values may be used in the 2D (PDF417) bar code for generic MSL shipment descriptions, but the data values 

shall be marked with metric units using an ANSI ASC X12.3 Data Element 355 (Unit or Basis for Measurement)

code. The ANSI ASC X12.3 data elements selected for use are: KG = kilograms, CM = centimeter, CC = cubic 

centimeter, MR = meter, CR = cubic meter. Decimal values are allowed in the 2D (PDF417) bar code. Human 

translations printed on the DoD MSL shall be in US standard formats and shall be rounded to the next higher whole 

number with leading zeros suppressed.

Note 5. The encoded data element consists of two sub data elements. The digits identify the item count. The last 

two characters are a machine-readable ANSI ASC X12.3 Data Element 355 (Unit or Basis for Measurement) code 

for the respective unit of issue sourced from the DD Form 1348-1. When printed as human-readable information, 

the ANSI ASC X12.3 Data Element 355 code is translated to a unit of issue code/abbreviation (see Table I)

.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

APPENDIX A

143

TABLE A-III. MSL (unit move) 2D (PDF417) bar code format.

Compliance 

Indicator

Element 

Separators

Format Header

Format 06 DI

Format 07 DEI

Data Field Data Format

Type/Length

Sample Data without 

DI/DEI

[)> Message Header Compliance 

Indicator [)>

RS 06 Data Identifier Format Header 06

GS JKUSM TCN an17 AWS1EAA$0D00340XX

GS 6JKUSM TTN n17 12345678901000007

GS I VIN an17 V739GXL1794AB12PZ

GS 9K TAC an4 YZZZ

GS 2L Ship To Address. an..35+an..35+

an..35+an..35+

an..35

See Note 1

1

st address line+2nd

address line+3rd address 

line+4th address line+5th

address line

GS 3L From Address an..35+an..35+

an..35

See Note 1

1

st address line+2nd

address line+3rd address 

line

GS 5L Consignee Address an..35+an..35+

an..35+an..35+

an..35

See Note 1

1

st address line+2nd

address line+3rd address 

line+4th address line+5th

address line

GS 51L Origin Zip Code 

for SEAVAN point of origin.

an5 45324

GS N NSN an..15 8115001682275

GS 2Q Weight (shipment piece)

default = pounds.

an..5+../an2

See Note 2

14000

GS 13Q Piece Number/Total Pieces an..4/an..4 1/1

GS 4R DODIC an4 PL23

GS 13S Security Seal Number an8 90876787

GS 25S Unique Item Identifier an..78 UN077991289123456789

0123

GS 1T Lot Number an..25 MCG77G002-060

GS 4V Ocean Carrier Code an4 SEAU

RS 07 Free Form Text Format Header 07

GS 03 Project Code an3 9BU

GS 04 ULN an..7 1234567

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

APPENDIX A

144

TABLE A-III. MSL (unit move) 2D (PDF417) bar code format - Continued.

Compliance 

Indicator

Element 

Separators

Format Header

Format 06 DI

Format 07 DEI

Data Field Data Format

Type/Length

Sample Data without 

DI/DEI

GS 05 UIC an6 WS1EAA

GS 06 Bumper Number an..8 HQ-123

GS 09 Unit Equipment Description an..20 HELICPR CARGO MH60K

GS 10 Model Identifier an..10 12345ASDFG

GS 12 Cube (shipment piece) an..4+../an2

See Note 2

1200

GS 15 Water Commodity/Special 

Handling Codes

an5 900Z9

GS 18 Length

Default = inches

n..6+../an2

See Note 2

1239

GS 19 Width

Default = inches.

n..4+../an2

See Note 2

123

GS 20 Height

Default = inches.

n..4+../an2

See Note 2

135

GS 21 Pallet Identifier an..6 DOVARC

GS 23 Air Dimension Code an1 A

GS 24 Container Number Code an5 13579

GS 25 POE Code an3 DOV

GS 26 POD Code an3 RMS

GS 27 Consignee DODAAC an6 W44TYH

GS 29 Consignor DODAAC an6 AWA2UC

GS 30 Method Code an1 A

GS 32 RDD an..3 123

GS 34 TCMD/Manifest Doc ID Code 

(header DIC only)

an3 TX1

GS 35 Text Comment an..60 60 text characters

GS 36 Serial Number / Package ID an..13 1234567890123

GS 38 Nomenclature an..14 Parts

GS 39 Number of Rounds n..6 112000

GS 40 UN Class/Division Code an2 1A

GS 41 UN/NA Indicator an2 UN

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

APPENDIX A

145

TABLE A-III. MSL (unit move) 2D (PDF417) bar code format - Continued.

Compliance 

Indicator

Element 

Separators

Format Header

Format 06 DI

Format 07 DEI

Data Field Data Format

Type/Length

Sample Data without 

DI/DEI

GS 42 UN/NATO ID Number an4 2766

GS 43 Compatibility Group Code an1 Z

GS 44 Net Explosive Weight n..6 449800

GS 49 Air Commodity/Special 

Handling Codes

an2 VD

GS 50 Type Pack Code an2 BX

GS 51 SEAVAN Ownership Code an4 SEAU

GS 55 CDIST Code an1 M

GS 56 SUs in Van n2 12

GS 57 Pieces in Van n4 1234

GS 58 Van Inside Cube n..4 1234

GS 59 Van Length n..2 40

GS 60 Van Number (complete) an8 12345678

GS 61 Check Digit n1 9

GS 62 Temperature Range an..5 F632

GS 63 Stopoff Number and 

Consignee DODAAC

n..2+an6 1AF5612

GS 76 Stopoff Consolidation Code an1 X

RS

EOT

Format Trailer

Message Trailer

Note 1. The plus symbol (+) is used as a delimiter between the data elements and is part of the data sub-string.

Note 2. To accommodate current automated information systems, US default values are assumed as shown. Metric 

data values may be used in the 2D (PDF417) bar code for generic MSL shipment descriptions, but the data values 

shall be marked with metric units using an ANSI ASC X12.3 Data Element 355 (Unit or Basis for Measurement)

code. The ANSI ASC X12.3 data elements selected for use are: KG = kilograms, CM = centimeter, CC = cubic 

centimeter, MR = meter, CR = cubic meter. Decimal values are allowed in the 2D (PDF417) bar code. Humanreadable values printed on the DoD MSL shall be in US standard formats and shall be rounded to the next higher 

whole number with leading zeros suppressed.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

APPENDIX A

146

TABLE A-IV. Unit pack and container identification 2D (PDF417) bar code format.

Compliance 

Indicator

Element 

Separators

Format Header

Format 06 DI

Format 07 DEI

Data Field Data Format

Type/Length

Sample Data without 

DI/DEI

[)> Message Header Compliance 

Indicator [)>

RS 06 Data Identifier Format Header 06

GS 4K Contract Line Item Number 

(CLIN)

an6 0013AB

GS 5K Contractor Shipment Number an7 PBPA001

GS 8K Contract Number an..21 N00023-90-D-0009 

GS N NSN an13 5950001234567

GS 17V CAGE Code an5 1AAA9

GS 1P Part Number an..16 9988771212SP

GS 7Q Quantity (Unit of Issue (UI)) an..5+an2 4EA

Item Unique Identification (IUID)

See A.2.5 and the following four examples which use DI ‘S’ to encode serial numbers and DI ‘25S’ to encode UIIs 

in the package. The 2D (PDF417) bar code may contain a mix of DIs S and 25S. The encoded serialized data 

structure follows the common data for each package – the common data is not repeated within the bar code for each 

NSN.

Example – 1 NSN, quantity of 1 item, serialization is based on one or more numbers.

Use DI ‘S’ and DI ‘25S’ in the Format 06 envelope to encode the serial number and/or UII for the item. The serial 

number and UII are thus associated to the same single item in the format envelope. The below example is for 1 

item.

GS S Serial Number or Code an..30 674A3601

GS 25S Unique Item Identifier (UII) an..50 D1AAA999123VA

Example (legacy only) – 1 NSN, multiple items, serialization is based on one or more numbers per item.

The following is a legacy business rule from a previous version of MIL-STD-129 – new systems must be able to 

read the 2D symbols but should not generate any in this format. In the first ISO/IEC 15434 Format 06 envelope

(for multiple items), DI ‘S’ encodes a serial number and DI ‘25S’ encodes a UII – the serialized numbers (serial or 

UII) are not linked together. A serial number and/or UII may or may not be encoded for each item.

The below example is for four different items with the same NSN: one item (in italics) has a serial number (DI ‘S’) 

not used to derive its UII (DI ‘25S’), one item (underlined) has a serial number used to derive its UII 

(DI ‘S’ and ‘25S’), one item (double underline) has just a serial number (DI ‘S’), one item has no serial number or 

UII and is therefore not listed. The data may be encoded in any order.

GS S Serial Number or Code an..30 674A3602

GS 25S Unique Item Identifier (UII) an..50 D1AAA999124VA

GS S Serial Number or Code an..30 9B25643M

GS 25S Unique Item Identifier (UII) an..50 D1AAA99B25643M

GS S Serial Number or Code an..30 674A3603

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

APPENDIX A

147

TABLE A-IV. Unit pack and container identification 2D (PDF417) bar 

code format – Continued.

Compliance 

Indicator

Element 

Separators

Format Header

Format 06 DI

Format 07 DEI

Data Field Data Format

Type/Length

Sample Data without

DI/DEI

Example (new format) – 1 NSN, multiple items, serialization is based on one or more numbers per item.

An additional Format 06 envelope (one per item) shall be used for each item to encode item-specific data (e.g. serial 

number (DI ‘S’), UII (DI ‘25S’), etc.) for the uniquely identified item. Additional information may be associated to 

each serialized item such as condition code, manufacturer CAGE, etc. A serial number and/or UII may or may not 

be encoded for each item.

The below example is for eight items with the same NSN – however, one item has no UII or serial number and is 

therefore not listed. 

RS 06 Data Identifier Format Header 06

GS S Serial Number or Code an..30 674A3604

RS 06 Data Identifier Format Header 06

GS S Serial Number or Code an..30 674A3605

RS 06 Data Identifier Format Header 06

GS 25S Unique Item Identifier (UII) an..50 06141411A0B9C3D5

RS 06 Data Identifier Format Header 06

GS 25S Unique Item Identifier (UII) an..50 06141411A0B9C3D6

RS 06 Data Identifier Format Header 06

GS 25S Unique Item Identifier (UII) an..50 D1AAA99B25972M

GS S Serial Number or Code an..30 9B25972M

RS 06 Data Identifier Format Header 06

GS S Serial Number or Code an..30 674A3606

GS 25S Unique Item Identifier (UII) an..50 D1AAA99B25974M

RS 06 Data Identifier Format Header 06

GS S Serial Number or Code an..30 674A3607

GS 25S Unique Item Identifier (UII) an..50 D1AAA99B25975M

Example – Multiple NSNs

Prepare a packing list for each NSN following the applicable examples above for 1 NSN.

RS

EOT

Format Trailer

Message Trailer

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

APPENDIX A

148

TABLE A-V. Ammunition/Explosives Packaging Label.

Mandatory (M)

Optional (O)

Compliance 

Indicator

Element 

Separators

Format Header

Format 06 DI

Data Field Data Format

Type/Length Sample Data without DI/DEI

M [)> Message Header Compliance 

Indicator [)>

M RS 06 Data Identifier Format Header 06

Mandatory Package Level Data

M GS 20S Label Traceability Code

Format is

UMYYMMDDhhmmssssRRNX

UM=unit for measurement

YY=year 

MM=month 

DD=date 

hh=hour 

mm=minute, 

ssss=seconds and hundredths 

of a second 

RR=random number

NX=label N of X labels

See Note 3.

an20

See Note 3

KT020218160123400612 

M GS 2Q Weight n..9

See Note 1

1700

O/M GS 3Q Weight Units

Use of ‘LB’ is optional.

Use of ‘KG’ is mandatory as 

applicable.

an2

See Note 3

LB

KG 

M GS 18Q Cube (Gross) an..9+an2

See Notes 2/3

225CF

Mandatory Stock Item Level Data

The stock item level data identifies the NSN or PN set of data (beginning with DI ‘N’ or DI ‘1P’) and may repeat for 

the package level set. Entries within each stock item data set may be in any order following DI ‘N’ or ‘1P’.

M GS N

1P

NSN

or

Part Number

an13..15

an..16

1234567890123

1234567890123JB

3456-9992-23456

M GS 4R DODIC an4 P123

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

APPENDIX A

149

TABLE A-V. Ammunition/Explosives Packaging Label - Continued.

Mandatory (M)

Optional (O)

Compliance 

Indicator

Element 

Separators

Format Header

Format 06 DI

Data Field Data Format

Type/Length Sample Data without DI/DEI

M GS 7Q Quantity

(Unit of Measure)

See Note 5.

n..9+an2

See Note 3

25EA

M GS 10PD Hazardous Material Code

(UN or NA ID Number)

See Note 4.

an2+an..4 UN1234

NA3456

M GS 6W Nomenclature an..44 KIT COMPONENT 1

Mandatory Lot Number / Serial Number Level Data

Within each NSN or PN data set, multiple serial numbers (beginning with DI ‘S’) or multiple lot number data sets 

(beginning with DI ‘1T’) may exist and be repeated. Within the lot number sets, multiple serial numbers may exist and 

be repeated . Entries within each data set may be in any order. See Note 6 for IUID marking as applicable.

M GS 1T Lot Number an..17 MCG77G002-161

M GS 7Q Quantity

(Unit of Measure)

See Note 5.

n..9+an2

See Note 3

20EA

M GS S Serial Number or Code an..30 1234567891

RS

EOT

Format Trailer

Message Trailer

Optional Data Elements

The following data elements are optional and may be encoded within the Ammunition/Explosives Packaging Label data 

structure shown above at the Services discretion to support Service unique requirements and criteria.

Upon transfer to another Service, all labels shall contain only the mandatory elements of this table, unless the gaining 

Service agreeds to accept the Service unique labels.

O GS 2R Condition Code a1 B

O GS 1B Container ID an2..11 TGHU2962459

WM2040001

O GS 12S Document Number an14 W81YWB63250111

O GS 14D Expiration Date

(YYYYMMDD)

an8 20090331

O GS L Facility/Building – Storage 

location

an..14 9097A

0101C0

O GS 20L Location/Grid an2..14 9097A001A002B

ABAB

O GS 7V Ownership Code n1 5

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

APPENDIX A

150

TABLE A-V. Ammunition/Explosives Packaging Label - Continued.

Mandatory (M)

Optional (O)

Compliance 

Indicator

Element 

Separators

Format Header

Format 06 DI

Data Field Data Format

Type/Length Sample Data without DI/DEI

O GS 86Y Purpose Code or Activity 

Classification Code

an2 P2

A2

O GS 20D QA Cert Date

(DDMMMYYY)

an9 03DEC2009

O GS 37Y QA Defect Code an6 2151AW

HAN52D

O GS 1H QA Stamp an9..10 FV5872001

1234567890

O GS 25S Unique Item Identifier (UII)

See Note 6

an..50

O GS 30T Weapons Stock Number 

(WSN)

an..14 BJ97B462500513

Note 1. The default unit for measurement of DI ‘2Q’ is assumed to be US pounds; if otherwise, a DI ‘3Q’ value shall 

also be encoded. Decimal values are allowed in the 2D (PDF417) bar code’s quantity fields and, if encoded, the total 

weight field in the 2D (PDF417) bar code should be rounded to the next whole number. Human-readable information 

for the total weight shall be rounded to the next whole number.

Note 2. The legacy ammo/explosives label used DI ‘7Q’ for the cube element using meta data of n..9+an2 where an2 is 

an ANSI ASC X12.3 Data Element 355 (Unit or Basis for Measurement) code referenced in Note 3 below.

Note 3. Ammunition/explosives quantities shall be encoded with a two-character ANSI ASC X12.3 Data Element 355

(Unit or Basis for Measurement) code following the numeric value, as applicable. Metric data values may also be used. 

The ANSI ASC X12.3 data elements selected for use are: PC= piece, ST=set, BX=box, CN=can, DR=drum, KT=kit,

PL=pallet/unit load, CH=container, RL=roll, EA=each, LB=pound, FT=foot, CF=cubic feet, KG=kilograms, 

CM=centimeter, CC=cubic centimeter, MR=meter, CR=cubic meter. Decimal values are allowed in the 2D (PDF417) 

bar code’s quantity fields and, if encoded, the total cube field in the 2D (PDF417) bar code should be rounded to the next 

whole number. Human-readable information for the total cube shall be rounded to the next whole number.

Note 4. The legacy ammo/explosives label used a different meta data format for DI ‘10P’. The legacy label used DI 

‘10PU+an..4’ to encode the Title 49 CFR, Part 172.101 United Nations (UN) HAZMAT identification numbers.

Note 5. The Quantity (unit of measure) element was designated for use by the Army Joint Munitions Command, Joint 

Ordnance Commanders Group, AIT Steering Group published Joint Ammo Package Label Specification (JAPLS) as 

amended by this standard. The Quantity (unit of measure) is a derived value of the MILSTRIP Quantity (unit of issue) 

using the DoD 4100.39-M defined quantitative expression for conversion (see Table III UM and UI definitions).

Note 6. DI ‘25S’ is provided for use as an optional element to accommodate IUID marking when the requirement is 

called out in a contract or policy documents for the respective ammunition or explosive. The 2D (PDF417) bar code 

may contain a mix of DIs ‘S’ and ‘25S’ in the serial number level data. See A.2.5 and the examples in Table IV for the 

Format 06 data structure used to associate a serial number with a UII, as applicable.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.
MIL-STD-129R

151

CONCLUDING MATERIAL

Custodians: Preparing activity:

 Army - SM Army - SM

 Navy - SA (Project PACK-2013-003)

 Air Force - 69

 DLA - DH

Reviewing activities:

 Army - AM, AR, AT, AV, CR, EA, GL, MI, MR, MT, PT, TE, TM

 Navy - AS, CG, EC, MC, OS, SH

 Air Force – 11, 13, 16, 70, 71, 84, 99

 DLA - CC, CT, DM, GS3, IS, PS

 OSD - SE

Miscellaneous:

 USTRANSCOM – USTC

Civil agencies:

 GSA - FAS

NOTE: The activities listed above were interested in this document as of the date of this 

document. Since organizations and responsibilities can change, you should verify the currency 

of the information above using the ASSIST Online database at https://assist.dla.mil.

Source: https://assist.dla.mil -- Downloaded: 2016-02-12T13:50Z

Check the source to verify that this is the current version before use.